OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/openrisc_me/openrisc_me/trunk

Subversion Repositories openrisc_me

[/] [openrisc/] [trunk/] [gnu-src/] [gcc-4.2.2/] [gcc/] [doc/] [include/] [texinfo.tex] - Blame information for rev 38

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 38 julius
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
2
%
3
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
5
%
6
\def\texinfoversion{2005-06-10.07}
7
%
8
% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
9
% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software
10
% Foundation, Inc.
11
%
12
% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
13
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
14
% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
15
% your option) any later version.
16
%
17
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
18
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
19
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
20
% General Public License for more details.
21
%
22
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
23
% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
24
% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
25
% Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
26
%
27
% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
28
% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
29
% restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
30
%
31
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
32
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
33
%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
34
%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
35
%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
36
% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
37
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
38
%
39
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
40
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
41
% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
42
%
43
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
44
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
45
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
46
%   tex foo.texi
47
%   texindex foo.??
48
%   tex foo.texi
49
%   tex foo.texi
50
%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
51
% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
52
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
53
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
54
%
55
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
56
% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
57
% full Texinfo distribution.
58
%
59
% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
60
 
61
 
62
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
63
 
64
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
65
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
66
% they might have appeared in the input file name.
67
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
68
  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
69
 
70
\message{Basics,}
71
\chardef\other=12
72
 
73
% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
74
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
75
\let\+ = \relax
76
 
77
% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
78
\let\ptexb=\b
79
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
80
\let\ptexc=\c
81
\let\ptexcomma=\,
82
\let\ptexdot=\.
83
\let\ptexdots=\dots
84
\let\ptexend=\end
85
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
86
\let\ptexexclam=\!
87
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
88
\let\ptexgtr=>
89
\let\ptexhat=^
90
\let\ptexi=\i
91
\let\ptexindent=\indent
92
\let\ptexinsert=\insert
93
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
94
\let\ptexless=<
95
\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
96
\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
97
\let\ptexplus=+
98
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
99
\let\ptexslash=\/
100
\let\ptexstar=\*
101
\let\ptext=\t
102
 
103
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
104
% starts a new line in the output.
105
\newlinechar = `^^J
106
 
107
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
108
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
109
%
110
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
111
  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
112
\else
113
  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
114
\fi
115
 
116
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
117
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
118
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
119
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
120
\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
121
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
122
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
123
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
124
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
125
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
126
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
127
\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
128
\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
129
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
130
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
131
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
132
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
133
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
134
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
135
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
136
%
137
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
138
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
139
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
140
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
141
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
142
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
143
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
144
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
145
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
146
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
147
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
148
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
149
%
150
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
151
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
152
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
153
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
154
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
155
 
156
% In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is
157
% in some cases the escape char.
158
\chardef\backChar  = `\\
159
\chardef\colonChar = `\:
160
\chardef\commaChar = `\,
161
\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
162
\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
163
\chardef\plusChar  = `\+
164
\chardef\questChar = `\?
165
\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
166
\chardef\underChar = `\_
167
 
168
\chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
169
\chardef\spacecat = 10
170
\def\spaceisspace{\catcode\spaceChar=\spacecat}
171
 
172
{% for help with debugging.
173
 % example usage: \expandafter\show\activebackslash
174
 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \active
175
 !global!def!activebackslash{\}
176
}
177
 
178
% Ignore a token.
179
%
180
\def\gobble#1{}
181
 
182
% The following is used inside several \edef's.
183
\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
184
 
185
% Hyphenation fixes.
186
\hyphenation{
187
  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
188
  ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
189
  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
190
  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
191
  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
192
  spell-ing spell-ings
193
  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
194
  wide-spread wrap-around
195
}
196
 
197
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
198
\newdimen\bindingoffset
199
\newdimen\normaloffset
200
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
201
 
202
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
203
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
204
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
205
%
206
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
207
 
208
% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
209
% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
210
% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
211
% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
212
% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
213
%
214
\def\|{%
215
  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
216
  \leavevmode
217
  %
218
  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
219
  \vadjust{%
220
    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
221
    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
222
    \vskip-\baselineskip
223
    %
224
    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
225
    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
226
    \llap{%
227
      %
228
      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
229
      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
230
      %
231
      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
232
      \hskip 12pt
233
    }%
234
  }%
235
}
236
 
237
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
238
% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
239
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
240
% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
241
% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
242
%
243
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
244
\def\loggingall{%
245
  \tracingstats2
246
  \tracingpages1
247
  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
248
  \tracingparagraphs1
249
  \tracingoutput1
250
  \tracingmacros2
251
  \tracingrestores1
252
  \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
253
  \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
254
    \tracingscantokens1
255
    \tracingifs1
256
    \tracinggroups1
257
    \tracingnesting2
258
    \tracingassigns1
259
  \fi
260
  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
261
  \errorcontextlines16
262
}%
263
 
264
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
265
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
266
%
267
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
268
  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
269
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
270
  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
271
\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
272
  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
273
 
274
% For @cropmarks command.
275
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
276
%
277
\newif\ifcropmarks
278
\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
279
%
280
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
281
% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
282
%
283
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
284
\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
285
\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
286
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
287
 
288
% Main output routine.
289
\chardef\PAGE = 255
290
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
291
 
292
\newbox\headlinebox
293
\newbox\footlinebox
294
 
295
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
296
% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
297
\def\onepageout#1{%
298
  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
299
  %
300
  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
301
  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
302
  %
303
  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
304
  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
305
  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
306
  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
307
  %
308
  {%
309
    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
310
    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
311
    % before the \shipout runs.
312
    %
313
    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
314
    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
315
    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
316
                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
317
    \shipout\vbox{%
318
      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
319
      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
320
      %
321
      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
322
        \hsize = \outerhsize
323
        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
324
        \vtop to0pt{%
325
          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
326
          \nointerlineskip
327
          \line{%
328
            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
329
            \hfill
330
            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
331
          }%
332
          \vss}%
333
        \vskip\topandbottommargin
334
        \line\bgroup
335
          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
336
          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
337
          \vbox\bgroup
338
      \fi
339
      %
340
      \unvbox\headlinebox
341
      \pagebody{#1}%
342
      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
343
        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
344
        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
345
        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
346
        \vskip 2\baselineskip
347
        \unvbox\footlinebox
348
      \fi
349
      %
350
      \ifcropmarks
351
          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
352
        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
353
        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
354
        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
355
        \vbox to0pt{\vss
356
          \line{%
357
            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
358
            \hfill
359
            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
360
          }%
361
          \nointerlineskip
362
          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
363
        }%
364
      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
365
      \fi
366
    }% end of \shipout\vbox
367
  }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive
368
  \advancepageno
369
  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
370
}
371
 
372
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
373
 
374
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
375
{\catcode`\@ =11
376
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
377
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
378
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
379
  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
380
\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
381
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
382
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
383
}
384
 
385
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
386
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
387
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
388
%
389
\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
390
\def\nstop{\vbox
391
  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
392
\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
393
\def\nsbot{\vbox
394
  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
395
 
396
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
397
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
398
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
399
%
400
\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
401
\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
402
  \def\next{#2}%
403
  \begingroup
404
    \obeylines
405
    \spaceisspace
406
    #1%
407
    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
408
}
409
 
410
{\obeylines %
411
  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
412
    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
413
    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
414
  }%
415
}
416
 
417
% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
418
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
419
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
420
 
421
% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
422
%
423
% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
424
%    @end itemize  @c foo
425
% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
426
% by \finishparsearg.
427
%
428
\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
429
\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
430
\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
431
  \def\temp{#3}%
432
  \ifx\temp\empty
433
    % We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run;
434
    % thus we reuse \temp.
435
    \let\temp\finishparsearg
436
  \else
437
    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
438
  \fi
439
  % Put the space token in:
440
  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
441
}
442
 
443
% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
444
% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
445
% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
446
% just before passing the control to \next.
447
% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
448
% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
449
% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
450
%
451
% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
452
%
453
\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}}
454
 
455
% \parseargdef\foo{...}
456
%       is roughly equivalent to
457
% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
458
% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
459
%
460
% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
461
% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
462
 
463
\def\parseargdef#1{%
464
  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
465
}
466
\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
467
  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
468
  \def#1##1%
469
}
470
 
471
% Several utility definitions with active space:
472
{
473
  \obeyspaces
474
  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
475
 
476
  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
477
  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
478
  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
479
  % should produce a line of output anyway.
480
  %
481
  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
482
 
483
  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
484
  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
485
  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
486
  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
487
}
488
 
489
 
490
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
491
 
492
% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
493
%
494
%   \envdef\foo{...}
495
%   \def\Efoo{...}
496
%
497
% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
498
% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
499
% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
500
% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
501
% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
502
%
503
% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
504
% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group.  (The
505
% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
506
% special case.)
507
 
508
 
509
% At runtime, environments start with this:
510
\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
511
% initialize
512
\let\thisenv\empty
513
 
514
% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
515
\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
516
\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
517
 
518
% Check whether we're in the right environment:
519
\def\checkenv#1{%
520
  \def\temp{#1}%
521
  \ifx\thisenv\temp
522
  \else
523
    \badenverr
524
  \fi
525
}
526
 
527
% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
528
\def\badenverr{%
529
  \errhelp = \EMsimple
530
  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
531
    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
532
}
533
\def\inenvironment#1{%
534
  \ifx#1\empty
535
    out of any environment%
536
  \else
537
    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
538
  \fi
539
}
540
 
541
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
542
% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
543
%
544
\parseargdef\end{%
545
  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
546
  \else
547
    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
548
    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
549
    \csname E#1\endcsname
550
    \endgroup
551
  \fi
552
}
553
 
554
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
555
 
556
 
557
%% Simple single-character @ commands
558
 
559
% @@ prints an @
560
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
561
\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
562
 
563
% This is turned off because it was never documented
564
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
565
%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
566
%% but suppressing ligatures.
567
%\def\`{{`}}
568
%\def\'{{'}}
569
 
570
% Used to generate quoted braces.
571
\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
572
\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
573
\let\{=\mylbrace
574
\let\}=\myrbrace
575
\begingroup
576
  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
577
  % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
578
  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
579
  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
580
  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
581
  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
582
  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
583
  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
584
  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
585
!endgroup
586
 
587
% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
588
\let\comma = ,
589
 
590
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
591
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
592
\let\, = \c
593
\let\dotaccent = \.
594
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
595
\let\tieaccent = \t
596
\let\ubaraccent = \b
597
\let\udotaccent = \d
598
 
599
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
600
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
601
\def\questiondown{?`}
602
\def\exclamdown{!`}
603
\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
604
\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
605
 
606
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
607
\def\imacro{i}
608
\def\jmacro{j}
609
\def\dotless#1{%
610
  \def\temp{#1}%
611
  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
612
  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
613
  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
614
  \fi\fi
615
}
616
 
617
% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
618
% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
619
%
620
\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
621
 
622
% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
623
% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
624
% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
625
% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
626
% \scriptscriptstyle).
627
%
628
\def\LaTeX{%
629
  L\kern-.36em
630
  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
631
   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
632
  \kern-.15em
633
  \TeX
634
}
635
 
636
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
637
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
638
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
639
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
640
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
641
{\catcode`@ = 11
642
 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
643
 % if the definition is written into an index file.
644
 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
645
 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
646
}
647
 
648
% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
649
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
650
 
651
% @* forces a line break.
652
\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
653
 
654
% @/ allows a line break.
655
\let\/=\allowbreak
656
 
657
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
658
\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
659
 
660
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
661
\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
662
 
663
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
664
\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
665
 
666
% @frenchspacing on|off  says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
667
%
668
\def\onword{on}
669
\def\offword{off}
670
%
671
\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
672
  \def\temp{#1}%
673
  \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
674
  \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
675
  \else
676
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
677
    \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
678
  \fi\fi
679
}
680
 
681
% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
682
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
683
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
684
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
685
 
686
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
687
% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
688
% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
689
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
690
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
691
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
692
% the text is small, which looks bad.
693
%
694
% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
695
% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
696
% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
697
% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
698
% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
699
% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
700
%
701
\newbox\groupbox
702
\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
703
%
704
\envdef\group{%
705
  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
706
    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
707
    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
708
  \fi
709
  \startsavinginserts
710
  %
711
  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
712
    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
713
    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
714
    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
715
    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
716
    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
717
    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
718
    \comment
719
}
720
%
721
% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
722
% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
723
% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
724
% above.  But it's pretty close.
725
\def\Egroup{%
726
    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
727
    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
728
    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
729
    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
730
  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
731
  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
732
  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
733
  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
734
  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
735
  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
736
  % group, force a page break.
737
  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
738
    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
739
      \page
740
    \fi
741
  \fi
742
  \box\groupbox
743
  \prevdepth = \dimen1
744
  \checkinserts
745
}
746
%
747
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
748
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
749
%
750
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
751
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
752
where each line of input produces a line of output.}
753
 
754
% @need space-in-mils
755
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
756
 
757
\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
758
 
759
% Old definition--didn't work.
760
%\parseargdef\need{\par %
761
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
762
%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
763
%{\baselineskip=0pt%
764
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
765
%\prevdepth=-1000pt
766
%}}
767
 
768
\parseargdef\need{%
769
  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
770
  % paragraph.
771
  \par
772
  %
773
  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
774
  \dimen0 = #1\mil
775
  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
776
  \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
777
  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
778
    %
779
    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
780
    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
781
    % And a page break here is fine.
782
    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
783
    %
784
    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
785
    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
786
    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
787
    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
788
    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
789
    %
790
    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
791
    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
792
    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
793
    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
794
    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
795
    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
796
    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
797
    \penalty9999
798
    %
799
    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
800
    \kern -#1\mil
801
    %
802
    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
803
    \nobreak
804
  \fi
805
}
806
 
807
% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
808
 
809
\let\br = \par
810
 
811
% @page forces the start of a new page.
812
%
813
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
814
 
815
% @exdent text....
816
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
817
 
818
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
819
% That's how much \exdent should take out.
820
\newskip\exdentamount
821
 
822
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
823
\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
824
 
825
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
826
\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
827
  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
828
 
829
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
830
% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
831
% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
832
%
833
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
834
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
835
%
836
\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
837
  \nobreak
838
  \kern-\strutdepth
839
  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
840
    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
841
    \vss
842
    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
843
    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
844
    \ifx#1l%
845
      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
846
    \else
847
      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
848
    \fi
849
    \null
850
  }%
851
}}
852
\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
853
\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
854
%
855
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
856
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
857
% else use TEXT for both).
858
%
859
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
860
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
861
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
862
  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
863
    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
864
    \def\righttext{#2}%
865
  \else
866
    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
867
    \def\righttext{#1}%
868
  \fi
869
  %
870
  \ifodd\pageno
871
    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
872
  \else
873
    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
874
  \fi
875
  \temp
876
}
877
 
878
% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
879
%
880
\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
881
\def\includezzz#1{%
882
  \pushthisfilestack
883
  \def\thisfile{#1}%
884
  {%
885
    \makevalueexpandable
886
    \def\temp{\input #1 }%
887
    \expandafter
888
  }\temp
889
  \popthisfilestack
890
}
891
\def\filenamecatcodes{%
892
  \catcode`\\=\other
893
  \catcode`~=\other
894
  \catcode`^=\other
895
  \catcode`_=\other
896
  \catcode`|=\other
897
  \catcode`<=\other
898
  \catcode`>=\other
899
  \catcode`+=\other
900
  \catcode`-=\other
901
}
902
 
903
\def\pushthisfilestack{%
904
  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
905
}
906
\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
907
  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
908
}
909
\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
910
  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
911
}
912
 
913
\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
914
\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
915
  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
916
 
917
\def\thisfile{}
918
 
919
% @center line
920
% outputs that line, centered.
921
%
922
\parseargdef\center{%
923
  \ifhmode
924
    \let\next\centerH
925
  \else
926
    \let\next\centerV
927
  \fi
928
  \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
929
}
930
\def\centerH#1{%
931
  {%
932
    \hfil\break
933
    \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
934
    \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
935
    \line{#1}%
936
    \break
937
  }%
938
}
939
\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
940
 
941
% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
942
 
943
\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
944
 
945
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
946
% @c is the same as @comment
947
% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
948
 
949
\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
950
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
951
\commentxxx}
952
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
953
 
954
\let\c=\comment
955
 
956
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
957
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
958
% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
959
% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
960
%
961
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
962
\def\noneword{none}
963
%
964
\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
965
  \def\temp{#1}%
966
  \ifx\temp\asisword
967
  \else
968
    \ifx\temp\noneword
969
      \defaultparindent = 0pt
970
    \else
971
      \defaultparindent = #1em
972
    \fi
973
  \fi
974
  \parindent = \defaultparindent
975
}
976
 
977
% @exampleindent NCHARS
978
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
979
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
980
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
981
\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
982
  \def\temp{#1}%
983
  \ifx\temp\asisword
984
  \else
985
    \ifx\temp\noneword
986
      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
987
    \else
988
      \lispnarrowing = #1em
989
    \fi
990
  \fi
991
}
992
 
993
% @firstparagraphindent WORD
994
% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
995
% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
996
% paragraphs.
997
%
998
% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
999
% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
1000
% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
1001
% By default, we suppress indentation.
1002
%
1003
\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
1004
\def\insertword{insert}
1005
%
1006
\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
1007
  \def\temp{#1}%
1008
  \ifx\temp\noneword
1009
    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
1010
  \else\ifx\temp\insertword
1011
    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
1012
  \else
1013
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
1014
    \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
1015
  \fi\fi
1016
}
1017
 
1018
% Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
1019
% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
1020
%
1021
% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
1022
% paragraph.
1023
%
1024
\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
1025
  \gdef\indent{%
1026
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1027
    \indent
1028
  }%
1029
  \gdef\noindent{%
1030
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1031
    \noindent
1032
  }%
1033
  \global\everypar = {%
1034
    \kern -\parindent
1035
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1036
  }%
1037
}
1038
 
1039
\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
1040
  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
1041
  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
1042
  \global \everypar = {}%
1043
}
1044
 
1045
 
1046
% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
1047
%
1048
\def\asis#1{#1}
1049
 
1050
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
1051
%
1052
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
1053
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
1054
% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
1055
% which is what @var uses.
1056
{
1057
  \catcode\underChar = \active
1058
  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
1059
    \catcode\underChar=\active
1060
    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
1061
  }
1062
}
1063
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
1064
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
1065
% this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
1066
% otherwise define @\.
1067
%
1068
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
1069
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
1070
%
1071
\def\math{%
1072
  \tex
1073
  \mathunderscore
1074
  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
1075
  \mathactive
1076
  $\finishmath
1077
}
1078
\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
1079
 
1080
% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
1081
% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
1082
% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
1083
%
1084
{
1085
  \catcode`^ = \active
1086
  \catcode`< = \active
1087
  \catcode`> = \active
1088
  \catcode`+ = \active
1089
  \gdef\mathactive{%
1090
    \let^ = \ptexhat
1091
    \let< = \ptexless
1092
    \let> = \ptexgtr
1093
    \let+ = \ptexplus
1094
  }
1095
}
1096
 
1097
% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
1098
\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
1099
\def\minus{$-$}
1100
 
1101
% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
1102
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
1103
% font as three actual period characters.
1104
%
1105
\def\dots{%
1106
  \leavevmode
1107
  \hbox to 1.5em{%
1108
    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil
1109
    .\hfil.\hfil.%
1110
    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil
1111
  }%
1112
}
1113
 
1114
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
1115
%
1116
\def\enddots{%
1117
  \dots
1118
  \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
1119
}
1120
 
1121
% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
1122
% Texinfo's parsing.
1123
%
1124
\let\comma = ,
1125
 
1126
% @refill is a no-op.
1127
\let\refill=\relax
1128
 
1129
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
1130
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
1131
% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
1132
%
1133
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
1134
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
1135
 
1136
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
1137
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
1138
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
1139
\def\setfilename{%
1140
   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
1141
   \iflinks
1142
     \tryauxfile
1143
     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
1144
     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
1145
   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
1146
   \openindices
1147
   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
1148
   %
1149
   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
1150
   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
1151
   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
1152
   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
1153
   \closein 1
1154
   %
1155
   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
1156
}
1157
 
1158
% Called from \setfilename.
1159
%
1160
\def\openindices{%
1161
  \newindex{cp}%
1162
  \newcodeindex{fn}%
1163
  \newcodeindex{vr}%
1164
  \newcodeindex{tp}%
1165
  \newcodeindex{ky}%
1166
  \newcodeindex{pg}%
1167
}
1168
 
1169
% @bye.
1170
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
1171
 
1172
 
1173
\message{pdf,}
1174
% adobe `portable' document format
1175
\newcount\tempnum
1176
\newcount\lnkcount
1177
\newtoks\filename
1178
\newcount\filenamelength
1179
\newcount\pgn
1180
\newtoks\toksA
1181
\newtoks\toksB
1182
\newtoks\toksC
1183
\newtoks\toksD
1184
\newbox\boxA
1185
\newcount\countA
1186
\newif\ifpdf
1187
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
1188
 
1189
% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
1190
% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
1191
% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
1192
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
1193
\else
1194
  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
1195
  \else
1196
    \ifcase\pdfoutput
1197
    \else
1198
      \pdftrue
1199
    \fi
1200
  \fi
1201
\fi
1202
 
1203
% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, to
1204
% for display in the outlines, and in other places.  Thus, we have to
1205
% double any backslashes.  Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
1206
% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e.  Not good.
1207
% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
1208
% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
1209
% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
1210
% that's we do).
1211
 
1212
% double active backslashes.
1213
%
1214
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
1215
 @gdef@activebackslash{@catcode`@\=@active @otherbackslash}
1216
 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
1217
   @catcode@backChar=@active
1218
   @let\=@doublebackslash}
1219
}
1220
 
1221
% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
1222
% not active characters.  hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
1223
% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens.  I've
1224
% tinkered with it a little for texinfo, but it's definitely from there.
1225
%
1226
% #1 is the tokens to replace.
1227
% #2 is the replacement.
1228
% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
1229
%
1230
\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
1231
  \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
1232
    ##1%
1233
    \ifx\\##2\\%
1234
    \else
1235
      #2%
1236
      \HyReturnAfterFi{%
1237
        \HyPsdReplace##2\END
1238
      }%
1239
    \fi
1240
  }%
1241
  \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
1242
}
1243
\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
1244
 
1245
% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
1246
\def\backslashparens#1{%
1247
  \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
1248
             % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
1249
  \HyPsdSubst{(}{\backslashlparen}{#1}%
1250
  \HyPsdSubst{)}{\backslashrparen}{#1}%
1251
}
1252
 
1253
{\catcode\exclamChar = 0 \catcode\backChar = \other
1254
 !gdef!backslashlparen{\(}%
1255
 !gdef!backslashrparen{\)}%
1256
}
1257
 
1258
\ifpdf
1259
  \input pdfcolor
1260
  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
1261
  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
1262
    \def\imagewidth{#2}%
1263
    \def\imageheight{#3}%
1264
    % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
1265
    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1266
    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1267
      \immediate\pdfimage
1268
    \else
1269
      \immediate\pdfximage
1270
    \fi
1271
      \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
1272
      \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
1273
      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
1274
         #1.pdf%
1275
       \else
1276
         {#1.pdf}%
1277
       \fi
1278
    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
1279
      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
1280
    \fi}
1281
  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
1282
    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
1283
    % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
1284
    \atdummies
1285
    \turnoffactive
1286
    \activebackslashdouble
1287
    \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
1288
    \backslashparens\pdfdestname
1289
    \pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz%
1290
  }}%
1291
  %
1292
  % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
1293
  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}%
1294
  %
1295
  \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
1296
  \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
1297
  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
1298
  % come from Petr Olsak
1299
  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
1300
    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
1301
  \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
1302
    \advance\tempnum by 1
1303
    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
1304
  %
1305
  % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
1306
  % outline by the pdf viewer.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
1307
  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node text,
1308
  % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
1309
  % #4 is the page number
1310
  %
1311
  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1312
    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
1313
    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
1314
    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
1315
    % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
1316
    \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1317
    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
1318
      \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
1319
    \else
1320
      % Doubled backslashes in the name.
1321
      {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1322
       \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
1323
    \fi
1324
    %
1325
    % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
1326
    {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1327
     \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
1328
    %
1329
    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
1330
  }
1331
  %
1332
  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1333
    \begingroup
1334
      % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
1335
      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
1336
      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
1337
      %
1338
      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
1339
      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1340
        \def\thischapnum{##2}%
1341
        \def\thissecnum{0}%
1342
        \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1343
      }%
1344
      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1345
        \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
1346
        \def\thissecnum{##2}%
1347
        \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1348
      }%
1349
      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1350
        \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
1351
        \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
1352
      }%
1353
      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1354
        \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
1355
      }%
1356
      \def\thischapnum{0}%
1357
      \def\thissecnum{0}%
1358
      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1359
      %
1360
      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
1361
      % al. a second time, below.
1362
      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
1363
      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1364
      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1365
      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1366
      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
1367
      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1368
      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1369
      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1370
      \readdatafile{toc}%
1371
      %
1372
      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
1373
      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
1374
      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
1375
      %
1376
      % We use the node names as the destinations.
1377
      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1378
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1379
      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1380
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1381
      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1382
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1383
      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
1384
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
1385
      %
1386
      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
1387
      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
1388
      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
1389
      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
1390
      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
1391
      %
1392
      % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
1393
      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right
1394
      % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
1395
      \indexnofonts
1396
      \setupdatafile
1397
      \activebackslash
1398
      \input \jobname.toc
1399
    \endgroup
1400
  }
1401
  %
1402
  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1403
    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1404
    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1405
      \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1406
        \advance\filenamelength by 1
1407
      \fi
1408
    \fi
1409
    \nextsp}
1410
  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
1411
  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1412
    \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1413
  \else
1414
    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1415
  \fi
1416
  \def\pdfurl#1{%
1417
    \begingroup
1418
      \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
1419
      \makevalueexpandable
1420
      \leavevmode\Red
1421
      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1422
        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1423
    \endgroup}
1424
  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1425
  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1426
  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1427
  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1428
  \def\maketoks{%
1429
    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
1430
    \ifx\first0\adn0
1431
    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1432
    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1433
    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1434
    \else
1435
      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1436
      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1437
        \let\next=\maketoks
1438
        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1439
        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1440
      \fi
1441
    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1442
    \next}
1443
  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1444
    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1445
  \def\pdflink#1{%
1446
    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1447
    \linkcolor #1\endlink}
1448
  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1449
\else
1450
  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
1451
  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
1452
  \let\endlink = \relax
1453
  \let\linkcolor = \relax
1454
  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
1455
\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
1456
 
1457
 
1458
\message{fonts,}
1459
 
1460
% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
1461
% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
1462
% italics, not bold italics.
1463
%
1464
\def\setfontstyle#1{%
1465
  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
1466
  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
1467
}
1468
 
1469
% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
1470
%
1471
\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
1472
 
1473
\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
1474
\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
1475
\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
1476
\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
1477
\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
1478
 
1479
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1480
% So we set up a \sf.
1481
\newfam\sffam
1482
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
1483
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1484
 
1485
% We don't need math for this font style.
1486
\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
1487
 
1488
% Default leading.
1489
\newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
1490
 
1491
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1492
% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1493
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1494
%
1495
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1496
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1497
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1498
%
1499
\def\setleading#1{%
1500
  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
1501
  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1502
  \normalbaselines
1503
  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
1504
    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1505
                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1506
  }%
1507
}
1508
 
1509
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
1510
% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
1511
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
1512
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
1513
 
1514
% Use cm as the default font prefix.
1515
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1516
% before you read in texinfo.tex.
1517
\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
1518
\def\fontprefix{cm}
1519
\fi
1520
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1521
\def\rmshape{r}
1522
\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
1523
\def\bfshape{b}
1524
\def\bxshape{bx}
1525
\def\ttshape{tt}
1526
\def\ttbshape{tt}
1527
\def\ttslshape{sltt}
1528
\def\itshape{ti}
1529
\def\itbshape{bxti}
1530
\def\slshape{sl}
1531
\def\slbshape{bxsl}
1532
\def\sfshape{ss}
1533
\def\sfbshape{ss}
1534
\def\scshape{csc}
1535
\def\scbshape{csc}
1536
 
1537
% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
1538
\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
1539
\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
1540
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1541
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1542
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1543
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1544
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1545
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1546
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1547
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1548
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1549
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1550
 
1551
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1552
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}
1553
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
1554
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
1555
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1556
 
1557
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1558
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1559
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
1560
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
1561
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
1562
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
1563
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
1564
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
1565
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
1566
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
1567
\font\smalli=cmmi9
1568
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
1569
 
1570
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1571
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1572
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1573
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
1574
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
1575
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
1576
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
1577
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
1578
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
1579
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
1580
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
1581
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
1582
 
1583
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1584
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1585
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1586
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1587
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1588
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1589
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
1590
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
1591
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
1592
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1593
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1594
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1595
\def\authorrm{\secrm}
1596
\def\authortt{\sectt}
1597
 
1598
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
1599
\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
1600
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1601
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1602
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1603
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1604
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
1605
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
1606
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
1607
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1608
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
1609
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
1610
 
1611
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
1612
\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
1613
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1614
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1615
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1616
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1617
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
1618
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1619
\let\secbf\secrm
1620
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1621
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
1622
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
1623
 
1624
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
1625
\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
1626
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1627
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
1628
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
1629
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1630
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
1631
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1632
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
1633
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}
1634
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
1635
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
1636
 
1637
% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
1638
\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
1639
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}
1640
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}
1641
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}
1642
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}
1643
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}
1644
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}
1645
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}
1646
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
1647
\font\reducedi=cmmi10
1648
\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
1649
 
1650
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
1651
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
1652
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
1653
% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
1654
% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
1655
%
1656
\def\resetmathfonts{%
1657
  \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
1658
  \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
1659
  \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
1660
}
1661
 
1662
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
1663
% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
1664
% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
1665
% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
1666
%
1667
% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
1668
% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
1669
% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
1670
%
1671
% This all needs generalizing, badly.
1672
%
1673
\def\textfonts{%
1674
  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
1675
  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
1676
  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
1677
  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
1678
  \def\curfontsize{text}%
1679
  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1680
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
1681
\def\titlefonts{%
1682
  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
1683
  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
1684
  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
1685
  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
1686
  \def\curfontsize{title}%
1687
  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
1688
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
1689
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
1690
\def\chapfonts{%
1691
  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
1692
  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
1693
  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
1694
  \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
1695
  \def\curfontsize{chap}%
1696
  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
1697
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
1698
\def\secfonts{%
1699
  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
1700
  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
1701
  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
1702
  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
1703
  \def\curfontsize{sec}%
1704
  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
1705
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
1706
\def\subsecfonts{%
1707
  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
1708
  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
1709
  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
1710
  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
1711
  \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
1712
  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
1713
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
1714
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
1715
\def\reducedfonts{%
1716
  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
1717
  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
1718
  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
1719
  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
1720
  \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
1721
  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1722
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
1723
\def\smallfonts{%
1724
  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
1725
  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
1726
  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
1727
  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
1728
  \def\curfontsize{small}%
1729
  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1730
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
1731
\def\smallerfonts{%
1732
  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
1733
  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
1734
  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
1735
  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
1736
  \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
1737
  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1738
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
1739
 
1740
% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
1741
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
1742
 
1743
% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
1744
% can fit this many characters:
1745
%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
1746
% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
1747
%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
1748
% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
1749
% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
1750
%
1751
% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
1752
%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
1753
%
1754
% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
1755
% --karl, 24jan03.
1756
 
1757
 
1758
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
1759
%
1760
\textfonts \rm
1761
 
1762
% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
1763
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
1764
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
1765
 
1766
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
1767
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
1768
 
1769
% Fonts for short table of contents.
1770
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
1771
\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}  % no cmb12
1772
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
1773
\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
1774
 
1775
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
1776
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
1777
 
1778
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
1779
% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
1780
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
1781
                    \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
1782
\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1783
\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1784
 
1785
% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
1786
% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
1787
\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1788
 
1789
% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
1790
% ttsl for book titles, do we?
1791
\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1792
 
1793
\let\i=\smartitalic
1794
\let\slanted=\smartslanted
1795
\let\var=\smartslanted
1796
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
1797
\let\emph=\smartitalic
1798
 
1799
% @b, explicit bold.
1800
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
1801
\let\strong=\b
1802
 
1803
% @sansserif, explicit sans.
1804
\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
1805
 
1806
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
1807
% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
1808
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
1809
%
1810
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
1811
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
1812
 
1813
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
1814
% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
1815
% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
1816
%
1817
\catcode`@=11
1818
  \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
1819
    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
1820
    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
1821
    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
1822
  }
1823
  \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
1824
    \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
1825
    \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
1826
    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
1827
  }
1828
\catcode`@=\other
1829
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
1830
 
1831
\def\t#1{%
1832
  {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
1833
  \null
1834
}
1835
\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
1836
\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1837
\font\keysy=cmsy9
1838
\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
1839
  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
1840
    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
1841
     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
1842
    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
1843
  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
1844
% The old definition, with no lozenge:
1845
%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
1846
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
1847
 
1848
% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
1849
\let\file=\samp
1850
\let\option=\samp
1851
 
1852
% @code is a modification of @t,
1853
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
1854
\def\tclose#1{%
1855
  {%
1856
    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
1857
    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
1858
    %
1859
    % Switch to typewriter.
1860
    \tt
1861
    %
1862
    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
1863
    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
1864
    %
1865
    % Turn off hyphenation.
1866
    \nohyphenation
1867
    %
1868
    \rawbackslash
1869
    \plainfrenchspacing
1870
    #1%
1871
  }%
1872
  \null
1873
}
1874
 
1875
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
1876
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
1877
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
1878
 
1879
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
1880
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
1881
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
1882
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
1883
%  -- rms.
1884
{
1885
  \catcode`\-=\active
1886
  \catcode`\_=\active
1887
  %
1888
  \global\def\code{\begingroup
1889
    \catcode`\-=\active  \catcode`\_=\active
1890
    \ifallowcodebreaks
1891
     \let-\codedash
1892
     \let_\codeunder
1893
    \else
1894
     \let-\realdash
1895
     \let_\realunder
1896
    \fi
1897
    \codex
1898
  }
1899
}
1900
 
1901
\def\realdash{-}
1902
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
1903
\def\codeunder{%
1904
  % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
1905
  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
1906
  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
1907
  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
1908
  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
1909
               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
1910
             \else\normalunderscore \fi
1911
             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
1912
            {\_}%
1913
}
1914
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
1915
 
1916
% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
1917
% each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is undesirable in
1918
% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
1919
% general.  @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
1920
%
1921
\newif\ifallowcodebreaks  \allowcodebreakstrue
1922
 
1923
\def\keywordtrue{true}
1924
\def\keywordfalse{false}
1925
 
1926
\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
1927
  \def\txiarg{#1}%
1928
  \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
1929
    \allowcodebreakstrue
1930
  \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
1931
    \allowcodebreaksfalse
1932
  \else
1933
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
1934
    \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
1935
  \fi\fi
1936
}
1937
 
1938
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
1939
% then @kbd has no effect.
1940
 
1941
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
1942
%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
1943
%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
1944
\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
1945
  \def\txiarg{#1}%
1946
  \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
1947
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
1948
  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
1949
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
1950
  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
1951
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
1952
  \else
1953
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
1954
    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
1955
  \fi\fi\fi
1956
}
1957
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
1958
\def\wordexample{example}
1959
\def\wordcode{code}
1960
 
1961
% Default is `distinct.'
1962
\kbdinputstyle distinct
1963
 
1964
\def\xkey{\key}
1965
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
1966
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
1967
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
1968
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
1969
 
1970
% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
1971
\let\indicateurl=\code
1972
\let\env=\code
1973
\let\command=\code
1974
 
1975
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
1976
% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
1977
% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
1978
% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
1979
% a hypertex \special here.
1980
%
1981
\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
1982
\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
1983
  \unsepspaces
1984
  \pdfurl{#1}%
1985
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1986
  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
1987
    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
1988
  \else
1989
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1990
    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
1991
      \ifpdf
1992
        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
1993
      \else
1994
        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
1995
      \fi
1996
    \else
1997
      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
1998
    \fi
1999
  \fi
2000
  \endlink
2001
\endgroup}
2002
 
2003
% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
2004
%
2005
\let\url=\uref
2006
 
2007
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
2008
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
2009
%
2010
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
2011
\ifpdf
2012
  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
2013
  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
2014
    \unsepspaces
2015
    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
2016
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2017
    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
2018
    \endlink
2019
  \endgroup}
2020
\else
2021
  \let\email=\uref
2022
\fi
2023
 
2024
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
2025
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
2026
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
2027
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
2028
%
2029
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
2030
 
2031
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
2032
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
2033
%
2034
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
2035
 
2036
\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
2037
 
2038
% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
2039
% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
2040
% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
2041
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
2042
 
2043
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
2044
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
2045
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
2046
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
2047
 
2048
% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
2049
% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
2050
% all-uppercase.
2051
%
2052
\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
2053
\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2054
  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
2055
  \def\temp{#2}%
2056
  \ifx\temp\empty \else
2057
    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2058
  \fi
2059
}
2060
 
2061
% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
2062
% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
2063
%
2064
\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
2065
\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2066
  {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2067
  \def\temp{#2}%
2068
  \ifx\temp\empty \else
2069
    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2070
  \fi
2071
}
2072
 
2073
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
2074
%
2075
\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
2076
 
2077
% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
2078
% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
2079
% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
2080
% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
2081
% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
2082
%
2083
% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
2084
% that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
2085
% font height.
2086
%
2087
% feymr - regular
2088
% feymo - slanted
2089
% feybr - bold
2090
% feybo - bold slanted
2091
%
2092
% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
2093
% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
2094
% Hmm.
2095
%
2096
% Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
2097
% Hope not.
2098
%
2099
%
2100
\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
2101
\def\eurofont{%
2102
  % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
2103
  % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
2104
  % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
2105
  % font installed.
2106
  %
2107
  % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
2108
  % that to the current nominal size.
2109
  %
2110
  % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
2111
  % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
2112
  %
2113
  \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
2114
  %
2115
  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
2116
    % bold:
2117
    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
2118
  \else
2119
    % regular:
2120
    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
2121
  \fi
2122
  \thiseurofont
2123
}
2124
 
2125
% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
2126
% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
2127
% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
2128
%
2129
\def\registeredsymbol{%
2130
  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
2131
               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
2132
    }$%
2133
}
2134
 
2135
% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
2136
%  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
2137
% so we'll define it if necessary.
2138
%
2139
\ifx\Orb\undefined
2140
\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
2141
\fi
2142
 
2143
 
2144
\message{page headings,}
2145
 
2146
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
2147
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
2148
 
2149
% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
2150
\newif\ifseenauthor
2151
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
2152
 
2153
% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
2154
% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
2155
%
2156
\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
2157
 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
2158
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
2159
 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
2160
 
2161
\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
2162
        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
2163
 
2164
\envdef\titlepage{%
2165
  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
2166
  \begingroup
2167
    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
2168
    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
2169
    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
2170
    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
2171
    \finishedtitlepagetrue
2172
    %
2173
    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
2174
    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
2175
    \let\oldpage = \page
2176
    \def\page{%
2177
      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
2178
         \finishtitlepage
2179
      \fi
2180
      \let\page = \oldpage
2181
      \page
2182
      \null
2183
    }%
2184
}
2185
 
2186
\def\Etitlepage{%
2187
    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
2188
        \finishtitlepage
2189
    \fi
2190
    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
2191
    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
2192
    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
2193
    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
2194
    \oldpage
2195
  \endgroup
2196
  %
2197
  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
2198
  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
2199
  \HEADINGSon
2200
  %
2201
  % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
2202
  \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
2203
    \shortcontents
2204
    \contents
2205
    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
2206
    \global\let\contents = \relax
2207
  \fi
2208
  %
2209
  \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
2210
    \contents
2211
    \global\let\contents = \relax
2212
    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
2213
  \fi
2214
}
2215
 
2216
\def\finishtitlepage{%
2217
  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
2218
  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
2219
  \finishedtitlepagetrue
2220
}
2221
 
2222
%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
2223
 
2224
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
2225
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
2226
 
2227
\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
2228
                \let\tt=\authortt}
2229
 
2230
\parseargdef\title{%
2231
  \checkenv\titlepage
2232
  \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
2233
  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
2234
  \finishedtitlepagefalse
2235
  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
2236
}
2237
 
2238
\parseargdef\subtitle{%
2239
  \checkenv\titlepage
2240
  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
2241
}
2242
 
2243
% @author should come last, but may come many times.
2244
% It can also be used inside @quotation.
2245
%
2246
\parseargdef\author{%
2247
  \def\temp{\quotation}%
2248
  \ifx\thisenv\temp
2249
    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
2250
  \else
2251
    \checkenv\titlepage
2252
    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
2253
    {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
2254
  \fi
2255
}
2256
 
2257
 
2258
%%% Set up page headings and footings.
2259
 
2260
\let\thispage=\folio
2261
 
2262
\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
2263
\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
2264
\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
2265
\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
2266
 
2267
% Now make TeX use those variables
2268
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
2269
                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
2270
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
2271
                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
2272
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
2273
 
2274
% Commands to set those variables.
2275
% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
2276
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
2277
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
2278
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
2279
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
2280
 
2281
 
2282
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
2283
\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2284
\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2285
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2286
 
2287
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
2288
\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2289
\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2290
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2291
 
2292
\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
2293
 
2294
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
2295
\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2296
\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2297
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2298
 
2299
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
2300
\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2301
\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2302
  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
2303
  %
2304
  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
2305
  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
2306
  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
2307
  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
2308
}
2309
 
2310
\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
2311
 
2312
 
2313
% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
2314
% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
2315
% @headings off         turns them off.
2316
% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
2317
% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
2318
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
2319
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
2320
% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
2321
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
2322
 
2323
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
2324
 
2325
\def\HEADINGSoff{%
2326
\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2327
\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
2328
\HEADINGSoff
2329
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
2330
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
2331
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
2332
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
2333
% edge of all pages.
2334
\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
2335
\global\pageno=1
2336
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2337
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2338
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
2339
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2340
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
2341
}
2342
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2343
 
2344
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
2345
% page number on top right.
2346
\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
2347
\global\pageno=1
2348
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2349
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2350
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2351
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2352
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2353
}
2354
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
2355
 
2356
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
2357
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
2358
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
2359
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2360
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2361
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
2362
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2363
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
2364
}
2365
 
2366
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
2367
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
2368
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2369
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2370
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2371
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2372
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2373
}
2374
 
2375
% Subroutines used in generating headings
2376
% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
2377
% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
2378
% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
2379
\ifx\today\undefined
2380
\def\today{%
2381
  \number\day\space
2382
  \ifcase\month
2383
  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
2384
  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
2385
  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
2386
  \fi
2387
  \space\number\year}
2388
\fi
2389
 
2390
% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
2391
% It generates no output of its own.
2392
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
2393
\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
2394
 
2395
 
2396
\message{tables,}
2397
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
2398
 
2399
% default indentation of table text
2400
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
2401
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
2402
\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
2403
% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
2404
\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
2405
 
2406
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
2407
\newdimen\itemmax
2408
 
2409
% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
2410
% these defs.
2411
% They also define \itemindex
2412
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
2413
 
2414
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
2415
 
2416
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
2417
 
2418
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
2419
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
2420
 
2421
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
2422
  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
2423
  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
2424
  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
2425
  \itemindex{#1}%
2426
  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
2427
  %
2428
  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
2429
  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
2430
  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
2431
  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
2432
  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
2433
  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
2434
    %
2435
    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
2436
    % but leave it ragged-right.
2437
    \begingroup
2438
      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
2439
      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
2440
      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
2441
      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
2442
    \endgroup
2443
    %
2444
    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
2445
    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
2446
    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
2447
    %
2448
    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
2449
    % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
2450
    % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
2451
    % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
2452
    % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
2453
    % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
2454
    %
2455
    \penalty 10001
2456
    \endgroup
2457
    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
2458
  \else
2459
    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
2460
    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
2461
    \noindent
2462
    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
2463
    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
2464
    % eventually be printed.
2465
    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
2466
    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
2467
    \unhbox0
2468
    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
2469
    \endgroup
2470
    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
2471
  \fi
2472
}
2473
 
2474
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
2475
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
2476
 
2477
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
2478
\envdef\table{%
2479
  \let\itemindex\gobble
2480
  \tablecheck{table}%
2481
}
2482
\envdef\ftable{%
2483
  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
2484
  \tablecheck{ftable}%
2485
}
2486
\envdef\vtable{%
2487
  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
2488
  \tablecheck{vtable}%
2489
}
2490
\def\tablecheck#1{%
2491
  \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
2492
    \endgroup
2493
    \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
2494
      that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
2495
    \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
2496
  \else
2497
    \let\next\tablex
2498
  \fi
2499
  \next
2500
}
2501
\def\tablex#1{%
2502
  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
2503
  \parsearg\tabley
2504
}
2505
\def\tabley#1{%
2506
  {%
2507
    \makevalueexpandable
2508
    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
2509
    \expandafter
2510
  }\temp \endtablez
2511
}
2512
\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
2513
  \aboveenvbreak
2514
  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
2515
  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
2516
  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
2517
  \itemmax=\tableindent
2518
  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
2519
  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
2520
  \exdentamount=\tableindent
2521
  \parindent = 0pt
2522
  \parskip = \smallskipamount
2523
  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
2524
  \let\item = \internalBitem
2525
  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
2526
}
2527
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
2528
\let\Eftable\Etable
2529
\let\Evtable\Etable
2530
\let\Eitemize\Etable
2531
\let\Eenumerate\Etable
2532
 
2533
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
2534
 
2535
\newcount \itemno
2536
 
2537
\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
2538
 
2539
\def\doitemize#1{%
2540
  \aboveenvbreak
2541
  \itemmax=\itemindent
2542
  \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
2543
  \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
2544
  \exdentamount=\itemindent
2545
  \parindent=0pt
2546
  \parskip=\smallskipamount
2547
  \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
2548
  \def\itemcontents{#1}%
2549
  % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
2550
  \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
2551
  \let\item=\itemizeitem
2552
}
2553
 
2554
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
2555
%
2556
\def\itemizeitem{%
2557
  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
2558
  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
2559
  {%
2560
   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
2561
   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
2562
   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
2563
   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
2564
   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
2565
   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
2566
   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
2567
   % that's the theory.
2568
   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
2569
   \noindent
2570
   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
2571
   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
2572
  \flushcr
2573
}
2574
 
2575
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
2576
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
2577
%
2578
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
2579
 
2580
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
2581
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
2582
% argument is the same as `1'.
2583
%
2584
\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
2585
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
2586
  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
2587
  \def\thearg{#1}%
2588
  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
2589
  %
2590
  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
2591
  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
2592
  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
2593
  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
2594
  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
2595
  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
2596
  \ifx\rest\empty
2597
    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
2598
    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
2599
    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
2600
    %   not equal to itself.
2601
    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
2602
    %
2603
    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
2604
    % continuing to look for a <number>.
2605
    %
2606
    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
2607
      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
2608
    \else
2609
      % It's a letter.
2610
      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
2611
        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
2612
      \else
2613
        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
2614
      \fi
2615
    \fi
2616
  \else
2617
    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
2618
    \numericenumerate
2619
  \fi
2620
}
2621
 
2622
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
2623
% given in \thearg.
2624
%
2625
\def\numericenumerate{%
2626
  \itemno = \thearg
2627
  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
2628
}
2629
 
2630
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
2631
\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
2632
  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2633
  \startenumeration{%
2634
    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2635
    \ifnum\itemno=0
2636
      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2637
                  alphabet}%
2638
    \fi
2639
    \char\lccode\itemno
2640
  }%
2641
}
2642
 
2643
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
2644
\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
2645
  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2646
  \startenumeration{%
2647
    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2648
    \ifnum\itemno=0
2649
      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2650
                  alphabet}
2651
    \fi
2652
    \char\uccode\itemno
2653
  }%
2654
}
2655
 
2656
% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
2657
% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
2658
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
2659
%
2660
\def\startenumeration#1{%
2661
  \advance\itemno by -1
2662
  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
2663
}
2664
 
2665
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
2666
% to @enumerate.
2667
%
2668
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
2669
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
2670
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2671
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2672
 
2673
 
2674
% @multitable macros
2675
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
2676
%
2677
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
2678
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
2679
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
2680
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
2681
 
2682
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
2683
 
2684
% To make preamble:
2685
%
2686
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
2687
%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
2688
%   @item ...
2689
%
2690
%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
2691
%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
2692
%   columns as desired.
2693
 
2694
 
2695
% Or use a template:
2696
%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2697
%   @item ...
2698
%   using the widest term desired in each column.
2699
 
2700
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
2701
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
2702
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
2703
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
2704
 
2705
% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
2706
% if they are.
2707
 
2708
% Sample multitable:
2709
 
2710
%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2711
%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
2712
%   @item
2713
%   first col stuff
2714
%   @tab
2715
%   second col stuff
2716
%   @tab
2717
%   third col
2718
%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
2719
%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
2720
%
2721
%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
2722
%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
2723
%   @end multitable
2724
 
2725
% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
2726
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
2727
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
2728
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
2729
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
2730
%                                                            to baseline.
2731
%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
2732
%
2733
\newskip\multitableparskip
2734
\newskip\multitableparindent
2735
\newdimen\multitablecolspace
2736
\newskip\multitablelinespace
2737
\multitableparskip=0pt
2738
\multitableparindent=6pt
2739
\multitablecolspace=12pt
2740
\multitablelinespace=0pt
2741
 
2742
% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
2743
%
2744
\let\endsetuptable\relax
2745
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
2746
\let\columnfractions\relax
2747
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
2748
\newif\ifsetpercent
2749
 
2750
% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
2751
% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
2752
%
2753
\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
2754
  \global\advance\colcount by 1
2755
  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
2756
  \setuptable
2757
}
2758
 
2759
\newcount\colcount
2760
\def\setuptable#1{%
2761
  \def\firstarg{#1}%
2762
  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
2763
    \let\go = \relax
2764
  \else
2765
    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
2766
      \global\setpercenttrue
2767
    \else
2768
      \ifsetpercent
2769
         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
2770
      \else
2771
         \global\advance\colcount by 1
2772
         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
2773
                   % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
2774
         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
2775
      \fi
2776
    \fi
2777
    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
2778
      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
2779
      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
2780
      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
2781
    \else
2782
      \let\go = \setuptable
2783
    \fi%
2784
  \fi
2785
  \go
2786
}
2787
 
2788
% multitable-only commands.
2789
%
2790
% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
2791
% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
2792
% of an alignment entry.  Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
2793
\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
2794
%
2795
% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
2796
% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
2797
% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
2798
%                                       --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
2799
\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
2800
 
2801
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
2802
%
2803
\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
2804
%
2805
\envdef\multitable{%
2806
  \vskip\parskip
2807
  \startsavinginserts
2808
  %
2809
  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
2810
  % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
2811
  % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
2812
  % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
2813
  \def\item{\crcr}%
2814
  %
2815
  \tolerance=9500
2816
  \hbadness=9500
2817
  \setmultitablespacing
2818
  \parskip=\multitableparskip
2819
  \parindent=\multitableparindent
2820
  \overfullrule=0pt
2821
  \global\colcount=0
2822
  %
2823
  \everycr = {%
2824
    \noalign{%
2825
      \global\everytab={}%
2826
      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
2827
      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
2828
      \checkinserts
2829
      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
2830
      %\filbreak
2831
        % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
2832
        % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
2833
        % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
2834
    }%
2835
  }%
2836
  %
2837
  \parsearg\domultitable
2838
}
2839
\def\domultitable#1{%
2840
  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
2841
  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
2842
  %
2843
  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
2844
  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
2845
  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
2846
  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
2847
  \halign\bgroup &%
2848
    \global\advance\colcount by 1
2849
    \multistrut
2850
    \vtop{%
2851
      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
2852
      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
2853
      %
2854
      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
2855
      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
2856
      % the first one.
2857
      %
2858
      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
2859
      % to the width of each template entry.
2860
      %
2861
      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
2862
      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
2863
      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
2864
      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
2865
      %
2866
      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
2867
      \rightskip=0pt
2868
      \ifnum\colcount=1
2869
        % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
2870
        \advance\hsize by\leftskip
2871
      \else
2872
        \ifsetpercent \else
2873
          % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
2874
          % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
2875
          \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
2876
        \fi
2877
       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
2878
      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
2879
      \fi
2880
      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
2881
      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
2882
      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
2883
      % For example:
2884
      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
2885
      % @item @code{#}
2886
      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
2887
      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
2888
      % marking characters.
2889
      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
2890
    }\cr
2891
}
2892
\def\Emultitable{%
2893
  \crcr
2894
  \egroup % end the \halign
2895
  \global\setpercentfalse
2896
}
2897
 
2898
\def\setmultitablespacing{%
2899
  \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
2900
  %
2901
  % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
2902
  % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
2903
  % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
2904
  % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
2905
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
2906
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
2907
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
2908
\fi
2909
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
2910
%% table. If not, do nothing.
2911
%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
2912
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
2913
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
2914
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
2915
                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
2916
\fi%
2917
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
2918
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
2919
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
2920
                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
2921
\fi}
2922
 
2923
 
2924
\message{conditionals,}
2925
 
2926
% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
2927
% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
2928
% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
2929
% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
2930
% attempt to close an environment group.
2931
%
2932
\def\makecond#1{%
2933
  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
2934
  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
2935
}
2936
\makecond{iftex}
2937
\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
2938
\makecond{ifnothtml}
2939
\makecond{ifnotinfo}
2940
\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
2941
\makecond{ifnotxml}
2942
 
2943
% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
2944
%
2945
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
2946
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
2947
\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
2948
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
2949
\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
2950
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
2951
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
2952
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
2953
\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
2954
\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
2955
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
2956
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
2957
\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
2958
 
2959
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
2960
%
2961
% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
2962
\newcount\doignorecount
2963
 
2964
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
2965
  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
2966
  \catcode`\@ = \other
2967
  \catcode`\{ = \other
2968
  \catcode`\} = \other
2969
  %
2970
  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
2971
  \spaceisspace
2972
  %
2973
  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
2974
  \doignorecount = 0
2975
  %
2976
  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
2977
  \dodoignore{#1}%
2978
}
2979
 
2980
{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
2981
  \obeylines %
2982
  %
2983
  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
2984
    % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
2985
    %
2986
    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1', which must be on a line
2987
    % by itself.
2988
    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
2989
    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
2990
    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
2991
    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
2992
    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
2993
    %
2994
    % And now expand that command.
2995
    \obeylines %
2996
    \doignoretext ^^M%
2997
  }%
2998
}
2999
 
3000
\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
3001
  \def\temp{#1}%
3002
  \ifx\temp\empty                       % Nothing found.
3003
    \let\next\doignoretextzzz
3004
  \else                                 % Found a nested condition, ...
3005
    \advance\doignorecount by 1
3006
    \let\next\doignoretextyyy           % ..., look for another.
3007
    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
3008
  \fi
3009
  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
3010
}
3011
 
3012
% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
3013
%
3014
\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
3015
  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0      % We have just found the outermost @end.
3016
    \let\next\enddoignore
3017
  \else                         % Still inside a nested condition.
3018
    \advance\doignorecount by -1
3019
    \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
3020
  \fi
3021
  \next
3022
}
3023
 
3024
% Finish off ignored text.
3025
\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
3026
 
3027
 
3028
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
3029
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
3030
%
3031
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
3032
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
3033
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
3034
% didn't need it.
3035
% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
3036
%
3037
\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
3038
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
3039
  {%
3040
    \makevalueexpandable
3041
    \def\temp{#2}%
3042
    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
3043
    \ifx\temp\empty
3044
      \next{}%
3045
    \else
3046
      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
3047
    \fi
3048
  }%
3049
}
3050
% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
3051
\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
3052
 
3053
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
3054
%
3055
\parseargdef\clear{%
3056
  {%
3057
    \makevalueexpandable
3058
    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
3059
  }%
3060
}
3061
 
3062
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
3063
\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
3064
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
3065
{
3066
  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
3067
  %
3068
  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
3069
    \let\value = \expandablevalue
3070
    % We don't want these characters active, ...
3071
    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
3072
    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
3073
    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
3074
    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
3075
    \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
3076
  }
3077
}
3078
 
3079
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
3080
% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
3081
% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
3082
% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
3083
% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
3084
% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
3085
% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
3086
%
3087
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
3088
  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
3089
    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
3090
    \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
3091
  \else
3092
    \csname SET#1\endcsname
3093
  \fi
3094
}
3095
 
3096
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
3097
% with @set.
3098
%
3099
% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
3100
%
3101
\makecond{ifset}
3102
\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
3103
\def\doifset#1#2{%
3104
  {%
3105
    \makevalueexpandable
3106
    \let\next=\empty
3107
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
3108
      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
3109
    \fi
3110
    \expandafter
3111
  }\next
3112
}
3113
\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
3114
 
3115
% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
3116
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
3117
%
3118
% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
3119
% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
3120
% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
3121
%
3122
\makecond{ifclear}
3123
\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
3124
\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
3125
 
3126
% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
3127
% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
3128
\let\dircategory=\comment
3129
 
3130
% @defininfoenclose.
3131
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
3132
 
3133
 
3134
\message{indexing,}
3135
% Index generation facilities
3136
 
3137
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
3138
% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
3139
\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
3140
 
3141
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
3142
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
3143
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
3144
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
3145
% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
3146
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
3147
% for the sake of vms.
3148
%
3149
\def\newindex#1{%
3150
  \iflinks
3151
    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
3152
    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
3153
  \fi
3154
  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
3155
    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
3156
}
3157
 
3158
% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
3159
%
3160
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
3161
 
3162
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
3163
%
3164
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
3165
%
3166
\def\newcodeindex#1{%
3167
  \iflinks
3168
    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
3169
    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
3170
  \fi
3171
  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
3172
    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
3173
}
3174
 
3175
 
3176
% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
3177
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
3178
%
3179
% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
3180
% inside @code.
3181
%
3182
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
3183
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
3184
 
3185
% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
3186
% #3 the target index (bar).
3187
\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
3188
  % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
3189
  % closing the target index.
3190
  \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
3191
    % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
3192
    % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
3193
    \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
3194
    \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
3195
  \fi
3196
  % redefine \fooindfile:
3197
  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
3198
  \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
3199
  % redefine \fooindex:
3200
  \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
3201
}
3202
 
3203
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
3204
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
3205
%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
3206
 
3207
% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
3208
% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
3209
 
3210
% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
3211
% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
3212
 
3213
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
3214
\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
3215
 
3216
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
3217
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
3218
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
3219
 
3220
% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
3221
% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
3222
% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
3223
%
3224
\def\indexdummies{%
3225
  \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
3226
  \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
3227
  % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
3228
  % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
3229
  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
3230
  \let\{ = \mylbrace
3231
  \let\} = \myrbrace
3232
  %
3233
  % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus
3234
  % effectively preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control
3235
  % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect
3236
  % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
3237
  % from whatever follows.
3238
  %
3239
  % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
3240
  % space.
3241
  %
3242
  % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
3243
  % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
3244
  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
3245
  %
3246
  \def\definedummyword##1{%
3247
    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}%
3248
  }%
3249
  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
3250
    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
3251
  }%
3252
  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
3253
  %
3254
  % Do the redefinitions.
3255
  \commondummies
3256
}
3257
 
3258
% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character.  So we want to
3259
% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
3260
% \realbackslash, still used for index files).  When everything uses @,
3261
% this will be simpler.
3262
%
3263
\def\atdummies{%
3264
  \def\@{@@}%
3265
  \def\ {@ }%
3266
  \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
3267
  \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
3268
  %
3269
  % (See comments in \indexdummies.)
3270
  \def\definedummyword##1{%
3271
    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}%
3272
  }%
3273
  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
3274
    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
3275
  }%
3276
  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
3277
  %
3278
  % Do the redefinitions.
3279
  \commondummies
3280
}
3281
 
3282
% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.  \definedummyword and
3283
% \definedummyletter must be defined first.
3284
%
3285
\def\commondummies{%
3286
  %
3287
  \normalturnoffactive
3288
  %
3289
  \commondummiesnofonts
3290
  %
3291
  \definedummyletter{_}%
3292
  %
3293
  % Non-English letters.
3294
  \definedummyword{AA}%
3295
  \definedummyword{AE}%
3296
  \definedummyword{L}%
3297
  \definedummyword{OE}%
3298
  \definedummyword{O}%
3299
  \definedummyword{aa}%
3300
  \definedummyword{ae}%
3301
  \definedummyword{l}%
3302
  \definedummyword{oe}%
3303
  \definedummyword{o}%
3304
  \definedummyword{ss}%
3305
  \definedummyword{exclamdown}%
3306
  \definedummyword{questiondown}%
3307
  \definedummyword{ordf}%
3308
  \definedummyword{ordm}%
3309
  %
3310
  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
3311
  \definedummyword{bf}%
3312
  \definedummyword{gtr}%
3313
  \definedummyword{hat}%
3314
  \definedummyword{less}%
3315
  \definedummyword{sf}%
3316
  \definedummyword{sl}%
3317
  \definedummyword{tclose}%
3318
  \definedummyword{tt}%
3319
  %
3320
  \definedummyword{LaTeX}%
3321
  \definedummyword{TeX}%
3322
  %
3323
  % Assorted special characters.
3324
  \definedummyword{bullet}%
3325
  \definedummyword{comma}%
3326
  \definedummyword{copyright}%
3327
  \definedummyword{registeredsymbol}%
3328
  \definedummyword{dots}%
3329
  \definedummyword{enddots}%
3330
  \definedummyword{equiv}%
3331
  \definedummyword{error}%
3332
  \definedummyword{euro}%
3333
  \definedummyword{expansion}%
3334
  \definedummyword{minus}%
3335
  \definedummyword{pounds}%
3336
  \definedummyword{point}%
3337
  \definedummyword{print}%
3338
  \definedummyword{result}%
3339
  %
3340
  % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
3341
  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
3342
  \makevalueexpandable
3343
  %
3344
  % Normal spaces, not active ones.
3345
  \unsepspaces
3346
  %
3347
  % No macro expansion.
3348
  \turnoffmacros
3349
}
3350
 
3351
% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
3352
%
3353
% Better have this without active chars.
3354
{
3355
  \catcode`\~=\other
3356
  \gdef\commondummiesnofonts{%
3357
    % Control letters and accents.
3358
    \definedummyletter{!}%
3359
    \definedummyaccent{"}%
3360
    \definedummyaccent{'}%
3361
    \definedummyletter{*}%
3362
    \definedummyaccent{,}%
3363
    \definedummyletter{.}%
3364
    \definedummyletter{/}%
3365
    \definedummyletter{:}%
3366
    \definedummyaccent{=}%
3367
    \definedummyletter{?}%
3368
    \definedummyaccent{^}%
3369
    \definedummyaccent{`}%
3370
    \definedummyaccent{~}%
3371
    \definedummyword{u}%
3372
    \definedummyword{v}%
3373
    \definedummyword{H}%
3374
    \definedummyword{dotaccent}%
3375
    \definedummyword{ringaccent}%
3376
    \definedummyword{tieaccent}%
3377
    \definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
3378
    \definedummyword{udotaccent}%
3379
    \definedummyword{dotless}%
3380
    %
3381
    % Texinfo font commands.
3382
    \definedummyword{b}%
3383
    \definedummyword{i}%
3384
    \definedummyword{r}%
3385
    \definedummyword{sc}%
3386
    \definedummyword{t}%
3387
    %
3388
    % Commands that take arguments.
3389
    \definedummyword{acronym}%
3390
    \definedummyword{cite}%
3391
    \definedummyword{code}%
3392
    \definedummyword{command}%
3393
    \definedummyword{dfn}%
3394
    \definedummyword{emph}%
3395
    \definedummyword{env}%
3396
    \definedummyword{file}%
3397
    \definedummyword{kbd}%
3398
    \definedummyword{key}%
3399
    \definedummyword{math}%
3400
    \definedummyword{option}%
3401
    \definedummyword{samp}%
3402
    \definedummyword{strong}%
3403
    \definedummyword{tie}%
3404
    \definedummyword{uref}%
3405
    \definedummyword{url}%
3406
    \definedummyword{var}%
3407
    \definedummyword{verb}%
3408
    \definedummyword{w}%
3409
  }
3410
}
3411
 
3412
% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
3413
% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
3414
% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
3415
% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
3416
%
3417
\def\indexnofonts{%
3418
  % Accent commands should become @asis.
3419
  \def\definedummyaccent##1{%
3420
    \expandafter\let\csname ##1\endcsname\asis
3421
  }%
3422
  % We can just ignore other control letters.
3423
  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
3424
    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{}%
3425
  }%
3426
  % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
3427
  \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
3428
  %
3429
  \commondummiesnofonts
3430
  %
3431
  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
3432
  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
3433
  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
3434
  %\let\tt=\asis
3435
  %
3436
  \def\ { }%
3437
  \def\@{@}%
3438
  % how to handle braces?
3439
  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
3440
  %
3441
  % Non-English letters.
3442
  \def\AA{AA}%
3443
  \def\AE{AE}%
3444
  \def\L{L}%
3445
  \def\OE{OE}%
3446
  \def\O{O}%
3447
  \def\aa{aa}%
3448
  \def\ae{ae}%
3449
  \def\l{l}%
3450
  \def\oe{oe}%
3451
  \def\o{o}%
3452
  \def\ss{ss}%
3453
  \def\exclamdown{!}%
3454
  \def\questiondown{?}%
3455
  \def\ordf{a}%
3456
  \def\ordm{o}%
3457
  %
3458
  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
3459
  \def\TeX{TeX}%
3460
  %
3461
  % Assorted special characters.
3462
  % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
3463
  \def\bullet{bullet}%
3464
  \def\comma{,}%
3465
  \def\copyright{copyright}%
3466
  \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
3467
  \def\dots{...}%
3468
  \def\enddots{...}%
3469
  \def\equiv{==}%
3470
  \def\error{error}%
3471
  \def\euro{euro}%
3472
  \def\expansion{==>}%
3473
  \def\minus{-}%
3474
  \def\pounds{pounds}%
3475
  \def\point{.}%
3476
  \def\print{-|}%
3477
  \def\result{=>}%
3478
  %
3479
  % Don't write macro names.
3480
  \emptyusermacros
3481
}
3482
 
3483
\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
3484
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
3485
 
3486
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
3487
% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
3488
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
3489
 
3490
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
3491
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
3492
% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
3493
% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
3494
%
3495
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
3496
  \iflinks
3497
  {%
3498
    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
3499
    \toks0 = {#2}%
3500
    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
3501
    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
3502
    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
3503
      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
3504
    \fi
3505
    %
3506
    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
3507
    %
3508
    \ifvmode
3509
      \dosubindsanitize
3510
    \else
3511
      \dosubindwrite
3512
    \fi
3513
  }%
3514
  \fi
3515
}
3516
 
3517
% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
3518
%
3519
\def\dosubindwrite{%
3520
  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
3521
  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
3522
    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
3523
  \fi
3524
  %
3525
  % Remember, we are within a group.
3526
  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
3527
  \escapechar=`\\
3528
  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
3529
      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
3530
  %
3531
  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
3532
  % get the string to sort by.
3533
  {\indexnofonts
3534
   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
3535
   \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
3536
  }%
3537
  %
3538
  % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
3539
  % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
3540
  % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
3541
  % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
3542
  % sorted result.
3543
  \edef\temp{%
3544
    \write\writeto{%
3545
      \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
3546
  }%
3547
  \temp
3548
}
3549
 
3550
% Take care of unwanted page breaks:
3551
%
3552
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
3553
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
3554
% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
3555
% \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
3556
% like this:
3557
% @end defun
3558
% @tindex whatever
3559
% @defun ...
3560
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
3561
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
3562
% the previous defun.
3563
%
3564
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
3565
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
3566
%
3567
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
3568
%
3569
% But wait, there is a catch there:
3570
% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
3571
% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
3572
% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
3573
% representation of the skip.
3574
%
3575
% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
3576
% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
3577
%
3578
\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
3579
%
3580
% ..., ready, GO:
3581
%
3582
\def\dosubindsanitize{%
3583
  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
3584
  \skip0 = \lastskip
3585
  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
3586
  \count255 = \lastpenalty
3587
  %
3588
  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
3589
  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
3590
  % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a
3591
  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
3592
  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
3593
  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
3594
  \else
3595
    \vskip-\skip0
3596
  \fi
3597
  %
3598
  \dosubindwrite
3599
  %
3600
  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
3601
    % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
3602
    % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
3603
    % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
3604
    % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
3605
    % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
3606
    %
3607
    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
3608
    %   @vindex index-whatever
3609
    %   Description.
3610
    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
3611
    % and the "Description." paragraph.
3612
    \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi
3613
  \else
3614
    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
3615
    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
3616
    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
3617
    \nobreak\vskip\skip0
3618
  \fi
3619
}
3620
 
3621
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
3622
%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
3623
% or
3624
%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
3625
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
3626
% containing these kinds of lines:
3627
%  \initial {c}
3628
%     before the first topic whose initial is c
3629
%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
3630
%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
3631
%  \primary {topic}
3632
%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
3633
%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
3634
%     for each subtopic.
3635
 
3636
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
3637
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
3638
 
3639
\def\findex {\fnindex}
3640
\def\kindex {\kyindex}
3641
\def\cindex {\cpindex}
3642
\def\vindex {\vrindex}
3643
\def\tindex {\tpindex}
3644
\def\pindex {\pgindex}
3645
 
3646
\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
3647
{\obeylines %
3648
\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
3649
\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
3650
 
3651
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
3652
 
3653
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
3654
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
3655
%
3656
\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
3657
  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
3658
  %
3659
  \smallfonts \rm
3660
  \tolerance = 9500
3661
  \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
3662
  %
3663
  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
3664
  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
3665
  % \initial {@}
3666
  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
3667
  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
3668
  \catcode`\@ = 11
3669
  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
3670
  \ifeof 1
3671
    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
3672
    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
3673
    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
3674
    % there is some text.
3675
    \putwordIndexNonexistent
3676
  \else
3677
    %
3678
    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
3679
    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
3680
    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
3681
    \read 1 to \temp
3682
    \ifeof 1
3683
      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
3684
    \else
3685
      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
3686
      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
3687
      % to make right now.
3688
      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
3689
      \catcode`\\ = 0
3690
      \escapechar = `\\
3691
      \begindoublecolumns
3692
      \input \jobname.#1s
3693
      \enddoublecolumns
3694
    \fi
3695
  \fi
3696
  \closein 1
3697
\endgroup}
3698
 
3699
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
3700
% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
3701
 
3702
\def\initial#1{{%
3703
  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
3704
  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
3705
  %
3706
  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
3707
  \removelastskip
3708
  %
3709
  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
3710
  \nobreak
3711
  \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
3712
  \penalty 0
3713
  \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
3714
  %
3715
  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
3716
  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
3717
  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
3718
  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
3719
  %
3720
  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
3721
  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
3722
  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
3723
  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
3724
  \nobreak
3725
  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
3726
}}
3727
 
3728
% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
3729
% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
3730
% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
3731
%
3732
% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
3733
%       \def\entry#1#2{...
3734
% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
3735
% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
3736
% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
3737
%
3738
% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
3739
%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
3740
\def\entry{%
3741
  \begingroup
3742
    %
3743
    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
3744
    % affect previous text.
3745
    \par
3746
    %
3747
    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
3748
    \parfillskip = 0in
3749
    %
3750
    % No extra space above this paragraph.
3751
    \parskip = 0in
3752
    %
3753
    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
3754
    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
3755
    %
3756
    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
3757
    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
3758
    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
3759
    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
3760
    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
3761
    %
3762
    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
3763
    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
3764
    \hangindent = 2em
3765
    %
3766
    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
3767
    % with blank space.
3768
    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
3769
    %
3770
    % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
3771
    % columns.
3772
    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
3773
    %
3774
    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
3775
    \afterassignment\doentry
3776
    \let\temp =
3777
}
3778
\def\doentry{%
3779
    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
3780
      \noindent
3781
      \aftergroup\finishentry
3782
      % And now comes the text of the entry.
3783
}
3784
\def\finishentry#1{%
3785
    % #1 is the page number.
3786
    %
3787
    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
3788
    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
3789
    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
3790
    \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
3791
    \def\tempb{#1}%
3792
    \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
3793
    \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
3794
    \ifx\tempc\tempd
3795
      \ %
3796
    \else
3797
      %
3798
      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
3799
      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
3800
      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
3801
      \hfil\penalty50
3802
      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
3803
      %
3804
      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
3805
      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
3806
      % \hbox ensues.
3807
      \ifpdf
3808
        \pdfgettoks#1.%
3809
        \ \the\toksA
3810
      \else
3811
        \ #1%
3812
      \fi
3813
    \fi
3814
    \par
3815
  \endgroup
3816
}
3817
 
3818
% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
3819
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
3820
  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
3821
 
3822
\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
3823
 
3824
\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
3825
\def\secondary#1#2{{%
3826
  \parfillskip=0in
3827
  \parskip=0in
3828
  \hangindent=1in
3829
  \hangafter=1
3830
  \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
3831
  \ifpdf
3832
    \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
3833
  \else
3834
    #2
3835
  \fi
3836
  \par
3837
}}
3838
 
3839
% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
3840
% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
3841
% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
3842
\catcode`\@=11
3843
 
3844
\newbox\partialpage
3845
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
3846
 
3847
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
3848
  % Grab any single-column material above us.
3849
  \output = {%
3850
    %
3851
    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
3852
    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
3853
    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
3854
    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
3855
    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
3856
    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
3857
    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
3858
    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
3859
      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
3860
    \fi
3861
    %
3862
    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
3863
      % Unvbox the main output page.
3864
      \unvbox\PAGE
3865
      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
3866
    }%
3867
  }%
3868
  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
3869
  %
3870
  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
3871
  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
3872
  %
3873
  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
3874
  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
3875
  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
3876
  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
3877
  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
3878
  %
3879
  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
3880
  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
3881
  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
3882
  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
3883
  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
3884
  %
3885
  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
3886
  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
3887
  % been clobbered.
3888
  %
3889
  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
3890
    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
3891
    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
3892
  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
3893
  %
3894
  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
3895
  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
3896
  \vsize = 2\vsize
3897
}
3898
 
3899
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
3900
% the last.
3901
%
3902
\def\doublecolumnout{%
3903
  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
3904
  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
3905
  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
3906
  % previous page.
3907
  \dimen@ = \vsize
3908
  \divide\dimen@ by 2
3909
  \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
3910
  %
3911
  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
3912
  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
3913
  \onepageout\pagesofar
3914
  \unvbox255
3915
  \penalty\outputpenalty
3916
}
3917
%
3918
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
3919
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
3920
\def\pagesofar{%
3921
  \unvbox\partialpage
3922
  %
3923
  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
3924
  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
3925
  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
3926
}
3927
%
3928
% All done with double columns.
3929
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
3930
  \output = {%
3931
    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
3932
    % current page, no automatic page break.
3933
    \balancecolumns
3934
    %
3935
    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
3936
    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
3937
    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
3938
    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
3939
    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
3940
    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
3941
    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
3942
    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
3943
  }%
3944
  \eject
3945
  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
3946
  %
3947
  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
3948
  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
3949
  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
3950
  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
3951
  \pagegoal = \vsize
3952
}
3953
%
3954
% Called at the end of the double column material.
3955
\def\balancecolumns{%
3956
  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
3957
  \dimen@ = \ht0
3958
  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
3959
  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
3960
  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
3961
  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
3962
  \splittopskip = \topskip
3963
  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
3964
  {%
3965
    \vbadness = 10000
3966
    \loop
3967
      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
3968
      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
3969
    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
3970
      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
3971
    \repeat
3972
  }%
3973
  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
3974
  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
3975
  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
3976
  %
3977
  \pagesofar
3978
}
3979
\catcode`\@ = \other
3980
 
3981
 
3982
\message{sectioning,}
3983
% Chapters, sections, etc.
3984
 
3985
% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course.  But we count the unnumbered
3986
% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
3987
% outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
3988
% numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
3989
% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
3990
\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
3991
\newcount\chapno
3992
\newcount\secno        \secno=0
3993
\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
3994
\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
3995
 
3996
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
3997
\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
3998
%
3999
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
4000
% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
4001
% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
4002
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
4003
%
4004
\def\appendixletter{%
4005
  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
4006
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
4007
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
4008
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
4009
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
4010
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
4011
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
4012
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
4013
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
4014
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
4015
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
4016
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
4017
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
4018
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
4019
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
4020
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
4021
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
4022
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
4023
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
4024
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
4025
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
4026
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
4027
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
4028
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
4029
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
4030
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
4031
  % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
4032
  % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
4033
  % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
4034
  % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
4035
  \else\char\the\appendixno
4036
  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
4037
  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
4038
 
4039
% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
4040
% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
4041
% However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks.
4042
\def\thischapter{}
4043
\def\thissection{}
4044
 
4045
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
4046
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
4047
 
4048
% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
4049
\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
4050
\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
4051
 
4052
% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
4053
\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
4054
\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
4055
 
4056
% we only have subsub.
4057
\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
4058
%
4059
% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
4060
% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
4061
\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
4062
%
4063
% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
4064
% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
4065
\def\chapheadtype{N}
4066
 
4067
% Choose a heading macro
4068
% #1 is heading type
4069
% #2 is heading level
4070
% #3 is text for heading
4071
\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
4072
  % Compute the abs. sec. level:
4073
  \absseclevel=#2
4074
  \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
4075
  % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
4076
  \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
4077
    \absseclevel = 0
4078
  \else
4079
    \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
4080
      \absseclevel = 3
4081
    \fi
4082
  \fi
4083
  % The heading type:
4084
  \def\headtype{#1}%
4085
  \if \headtype U%
4086
    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
4087
      \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
4088
    \fi
4089
  \else
4090
    % Check for appendix sections:
4091
    \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
4092
      \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
4093
    \else
4094
      \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
4095
        \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
4096
      \fi\fi
4097
    \fi
4098
    % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
4099
    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
4100
      \def\headtype{U}%
4101
    \else
4102
      \chardef\unmlevel = 3
4103
    \fi
4104
  \fi
4105
  % Now print the heading:
4106
  \if \headtype U%
4107
    \ifcase\absseclevel
4108
        \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
4109
    \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
4110
    \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
4111
    \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
4112
    \fi
4113
  \else
4114
    \if \headtype A%
4115
      \ifcase\absseclevel
4116
          \appendixzzz{#3}%
4117
      \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
4118
      \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
4119
      \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
4120
      \fi
4121
    \else
4122
      \ifcase\absseclevel
4123
          \chapterzzz{#3}%
4124
      \or \seczzz{#3}%
4125
      \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
4126
      \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
4127
      \fi
4128
    \fi
4129
  \fi
4130
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
4131
}
4132
 
4133
% an interface:
4134
\def\numhead{\genhead N}
4135
\def\apphead{\genhead A}
4136
\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
4137
 
4138
% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
4139
% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
4140
%
4141
% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
4142
% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
4143
\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
4144
%
4145
\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
4146
\def\chapterzzz#1{%
4147
  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
4148
  % as an @include file.
4149
  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
4150
    \global\advance\chapno by 1
4151
  %
4152
  % Used for \float.
4153
  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
4154
  \resetallfloatnos
4155
  %
4156
  \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
4157
  %
4158
  % Write the actual heading.
4159
  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
4160
  %
4161
  % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
4162
  \global\let\section = \numberedsec
4163
  \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
4164
  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
4165
}
4166
 
4167
\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
4168
\def\appendixzzz#1{%
4169
  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
4170
    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
4171
  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
4172
  \resetallfloatnos
4173
  %
4174
  \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
4175
  \message{\appendixnum}%
4176
  %
4177
  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
4178
  %
4179
  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
4180
  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
4181
  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
4182
}
4183
 
4184
\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
4185
\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
4186
  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
4187
    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
4188
  %
4189
  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
4190
  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
4191
  \resetallfloatnos
4192
  %
4193
  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
4194
  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
4195
  % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
4196
  % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
4197
  % to be executed, not expanded).
4198
  %
4199
  % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
4200
  % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
4201
  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
4202
  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
4203
  % the toc entries.)
4204
  \toks0 = {#1}%
4205
  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
4206
  %
4207
  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
4208
  %
4209
  \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
4210
  \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
4211
  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
4212
}
4213
 
4214
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
4215
\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
4216
  % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
4217
  % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
4218
  % Thus we are safer this way:         --kasal, 24feb04
4219
  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
4220
  \unnmhead0{#1}%
4221
  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
4222
}
4223
 
4224
% @top is like @unnumbered.
4225
\let\top\unnumbered
4226
 
4227
% Sections.
4228
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
4229
\def\seczzz#1{%
4230
  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
4231
  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
4232
}
4233
 
4234
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
4235
\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
4236
  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
4237
  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
4238
}
4239
\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
4240
 
4241
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
4242
\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
4243
  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
4244
  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
4245
}
4246
 
4247
% Subsections.
4248
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
4249
\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
4250
  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
4251
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
4252
}
4253
 
4254
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
4255
\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
4256
  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
4257
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
4258
                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
4259
}
4260
 
4261
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
4262
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
4263
  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
4264
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
4265
                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
4266
}
4267
 
4268
% Subsubsections.
4269
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
4270
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
4271
  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4272
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
4273
                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4274
}
4275
 
4276
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
4277
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
4278
  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4279
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
4280
                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4281
}
4282
 
4283
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
4284
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
4285
  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4286
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
4287
                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4288
}
4289
 
4290
% These macros control what the section commands do, according
4291
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
4292
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
4293
\let\section = \numberedsec
4294
\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
4295
\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
4296
 
4297
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
4298
 
4299
% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
4300
%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
4301
%          overlong headings to fold.
4302
%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
4303
%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
4304
%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
4305
%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
4306
 
4307
 
4308
\def\majorheading{%
4309
  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
4310
  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
4311
}
4312
 
4313
\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
4314
\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
4315
  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4316
                    \parindent=0pt\raggedright
4317
                    \rm #1\hfill}}%
4318
  \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
4319
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
4320
}
4321
 
4322
% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
4323
\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4324
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4325
\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4326
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4327
\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4328
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4329
 
4330
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
4331
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
4332
% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
4333
 
4334
%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
4335
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
4336
 
4337
%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
4338
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
4339
 
4340
\newskip\chapheadingskip
4341
 
4342
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
4343
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
4344
\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
4345
 
4346
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
4347
 
4348
\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
4349
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
4350
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
4351
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
4352
 
4353
\def\CHAPPAGon{%
4354
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
4355
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
4356
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
4357
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
4358
 
4359
\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
4360
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
4361
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
4362
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
4363
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
4364
 
4365
\CHAPPAGon
4366
 
4367
% Chapter opening.
4368
%
4369
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
4370
% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
4371
%
4372
% To test against our argument.
4373
\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
4374
\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
4375
\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
4376
%
4377
\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
4378
  \pchapsepmacro
4379
  {%
4380
    \chapfonts \rm
4381
    %
4382
    % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the
4383
    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
4384
    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
4385
    \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4386
    \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
4387
    %
4388
    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
4389
    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
4390
    \def\temptype{#2}%
4391
    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
4392
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4393
      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
4394
      \gdef\thischapter{#1}%
4395
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
4396
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
4397
      \def\toctype{omit}%
4398
      \gdef\thischapter{}%
4399
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
4400
      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
4401
      \def\toctype{app}%
4402
      % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
4403
      % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.  And we don't
4404
      % use \thissection because that changes with each section.
4405
      %
4406
      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
4407
                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
4408
    \else
4409
      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
4410
      \def\toctype{numchap}%
4411
      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
4412
                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
4413
    \fi\fi\fi
4414
    %
4415
    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
4416
    % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
4417
    % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
4418
    \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
4419
    %
4420
    % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
4421
    % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
4422
    % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
4423
    % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
4424
    % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
4425
    \donoderef{#2}%
4426
    %
4427
    % Typeset the actual heading.
4428
    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
4429
          \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
4430
          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
4431
  }%
4432
  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
4433
  \nobreak
4434
}
4435
 
4436
% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
4437
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
4438
\def\centerparameters{%
4439
  \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
4440
  \leftskip = \rightskip
4441
  \parfillskip = 0pt
4442
}
4443
 
4444
 
4445
% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
4446
% updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
4447
%
4448
\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
4449
%
4450
\def\unnchfopen #1{%
4451
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4452
                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
4453
                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
4454
}
4455
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
4456
\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
4457
\par\penalty 5000 %
4458
}
4459
\def\centerchfopen #1{%
4460
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4461
                       \parindent=0pt
4462
                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
4463
}
4464
\def\CHAPFopen{%
4465
  \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
4466
  \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
4467
 
4468
 
4469
% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
4470
% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
4471
%
4472
\newskip\secheadingskip
4473
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
4474
 
4475
% Subsection titles.
4476
\newskip\subsecheadingskip
4477
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
4478
 
4479
% Subsubsection titles.
4480
\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
4481
\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
4482
 
4483
 
4484
% Print any size, any type, section title.
4485
%
4486
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
4487
% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
4488
% section number.
4489
%
4490
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
4491
  {%
4492
    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
4493
    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
4494
    %
4495
    % Insert space above the heading.
4496
    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
4497
    %
4498
    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
4499
    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
4500
    \def\temptype{#3}%
4501
    %
4502
    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
4503
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4504
      \def\toctype{unn}%
4505
      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4506
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
4507
      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
4508
      % and don't redefine \thissection.
4509
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4510
      \def\toctype{omit}%
4511
      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
4512
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
4513
      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
4514
      \def\toctype{app}%
4515
      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4516
    \else
4517
      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
4518
      \def\toctype{num}%
4519
      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4520
    \fi\fi\fi
4521
    %
4522
    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chfplain.
4523
    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
4524
    %
4525
    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
4526
    % Again, see comments in \chfplain.
4527
    \donoderef{#3}%
4528
    %
4529
    % Output the actual section heading.
4530
    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
4531
          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
4532
          \unhbox0 #1}%
4533
  }%
4534
  % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
4535
  % Don't allow stretch, though.
4536
  \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
4537
  %
4538
  % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
4539
  % was followed by glue.
4540
  \nobreak
4541
  %
4542
  % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
4543
  % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
4544
  % discardable item.)
4545
  \vskip-\parskip
4546
  %
4547
  % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
4548
  % 10000.  This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
4549
  % section headings.  Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
4550
  %
4551
  %   @section sec-whatever
4552
  %   @deffn def-whatever
4553
  \penalty 10001
4554
}
4555
 
4556
 
4557
\message{toc,}
4558
% Table of contents.
4559
\newwrite\tocfile
4560
 
4561
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
4562
% Called from @chapter, etc.
4563
%
4564
% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
4565
% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
4566
% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
4567
% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
4568
% destination to jump to.
4569
%
4570
% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
4571
% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
4572
% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
4573
% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
4574
%
4575
\newif\iftocfileopened
4576
\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
4577
%
4578
\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
4579
  \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
4580
  \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
4581
    \iftocfileopened\else
4582
      \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
4583
      \global\tocfileopenedtrue
4584
    \fi
4585
    %
4586
    \iflinks
4587
      {\atdummies \turnoffactive
4588
       \edef\temp{%
4589
         \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
4590
       \temp
4591
      }
4592
    \fi
4593
  \fi
4594
  %
4595
  % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
4596
  % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
4597
  % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
4598
  % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
4599
  % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
4600
  % `1', and two named `2'.
4601
  \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
4602
}
4603
 
4604
 
4605
% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
4606
% fonts, so we must take special care.  This is more or less redundant
4607
% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
4608
%
4609
\def\activecatcodes{%
4610
  \catcode`\"=\active
4611
  \catcode`\$=\active
4612
  \catcode`\<=\active
4613
  \catcode`\>=\active
4614
  \catcode`\\=\active
4615
  \catcode`\^=\active
4616
  \catcode`\_=\active
4617
  \catcode`\|=\active
4618
  \catcode`\~=\active
4619
}
4620
 
4621
 
4622
% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
4623
\def\readtocfile{%
4624
  \setupdatafile
4625
  \activecatcodes
4626
  \input \jobname.toc
4627
}
4628
 
4629
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
4630
\newcount\savepageno
4631
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
4632
 
4633
% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
4634
%
4635
\def\startcontents#1{%
4636
  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
4637
  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
4638
  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
4639
  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
4640
  \contentsalignmacro
4641
  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
4642
  %
4643
  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
4644
  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
4645
  \def\thischapter{}%
4646
  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
4647
  %
4648
  \savepageno = \pageno
4649
  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
4650
    \raggedbottom              % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
4651
    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
4652
    %
4653
    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
4654
    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
4655
}
4656
 
4657
 
4658
% Normal (long) toc.
4659
\def\contents{%
4660
  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
4661
    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
4662
    \ifeof 1 \else
4663
      \readtocfile
4664
    \fi
4665
    \vfill \eject
4666
    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
4667
    \ifeof 1 \else
4668
      \pdfmakeoutlines
4669
    \fi
4670
    \closein 1
4671
  \endgroup
4672
  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
4673
  \global\pageno = \savepageno
4674
}
4675
 
4676
% And just the chapters.
4677
\def\summarycontents{%
4678
  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
4679
    %
4680
    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
4681
    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
4682
    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
4683
    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
4684
    \secfonts
4685
    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
4686
    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
4687
    \rm
4688
    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
4689
    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
4690
    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
4691
    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
4692
    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
4693
    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4694
    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4695
    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4696
    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4697
    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4698
    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4699
    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
4700
    \ifeof 1 \else
4701
      \readtocfile
4702
    \fi
4703
    \closein 1
4704
    \vfill \eject
4705
    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
4706
  \endgroup
4707
  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
4708
  \global\pageno = \savepageno
4709
}
4710
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
4711
 
4712
% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
4713
% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
4714
%
4715
\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
4716
  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
4717
  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
4718
  % But use \hss just in case.
4719
  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
4720
  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
4721
  %
4722
  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
4723
  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
4724
  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
4725
  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
4726
  % there are before deciding ...
4727
  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
4728
}
4729
 
4730
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
4731
% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
4732
% The last argument is the page number.
4733
% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
4734
 
4735
% Chapters, in the main contents.
4736
\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4737
%
4738
% Chapters, in the short toc.
4739
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
4740
\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
4741
  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
4742
}
4743
 
4744
% Appendices, in the main contents.
4745
% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
4746
%
4747
\def\appendixbox#1{%
4748
  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
4749
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
4750
  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
4751
%
4752
\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4753
 
4754
% Unnumbered chapters.
4755
\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
4756
\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
4757
 
4758
% Sections.
4759
\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4760
\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
4761
\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
4762
 
4763
% Subsections.
4764
\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4765
\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
4766
\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
4767
 
4768
% And subsubsections.
4769
\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4770
\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
4771
\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
4772
 
4773
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
4774
% Same as \defaultparindent.
4775
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
4776
 
4777
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
4778
% page number.
4779
%
4780
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
4781
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
4782
\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
4783
   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
4784
   \begingroup
4785
     \chapentryfonts
4786
     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4787
   \endgroup
4788
   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
4789
}
4790
 
4791
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4792
  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
4793
  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4794
\endgroup}
4795
 
4796
\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4797
  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
4798
  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4799
\endgroup}
4800
 
4801
\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4802
  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
4803
  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4804
\endgroup}
4805
 
4806
% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
4807
\let\tocentry = \entry
4808
 
4809
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
4810
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
4811
 
4812
\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
4813
\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
4814
 
4815
\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
4816
\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
4817
\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
4818
\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
4819
 
4820
 
4821
\message{environments,}
4822
% @foo ... @end foo.
4823
 
4824
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
4825
%
4826
% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
4827
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
4828
%
4829
\def\point{$\star$}
4830
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
4831
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
4832
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
4833
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
4834
 
4835
% The @error{} command.
4836
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
4837
%
4838
\newbox\errorbox
4839
%
4840
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
4841
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
4842
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
4843
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
4844
%
4845
\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
4846
   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
4847
   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
4848
   \vbox{%
4849
      \hrule height\dimen2
4850
      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
4851
         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
4852
         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
4853
      \hrule height\dimen2}
4854
    \hfil}
4855
%
4856
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
4857
 
4858
% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
4859
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
4860
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
4861
 
4862
\envdef\tex{%
4863
  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
4864
  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
4865
  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
4866
  \catcode `\%=14
4867
  \catcode `\+=\other
4868
  \catcode `\"=\other
4869
  \catcode `\|=\other
4870
  \catcode `\<=\other
4871
  \catcode `\>=\other
4872
  \escapechar=`\\
4873
  %
4874
  \let\b=\ptexb
4875
  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
4876
  \let\c=\ptexc
4877
  \let\,=\ptexcomma
4878
  \let\.=\ptexdot
4879
  \let\dots=\ptexdots
4880
  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
4881
  \let\!=\ptexexclam
4882
  \let\i=\ptexi
4883
  \let\indent=\ptexindent
4884
  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
4885
  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
4886
  \let\+=\tabalign
4887
  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
4888
  \let\/=\ptexslash
4889
  \let\*=\ptexstar
4890
  \let\t=\ptext
4891
  \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
4892
  %
4893
  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
4894
  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
4895
  \def\@{@}%
4896
}
4897
% There is no need to define \Etex.
4898
 
4899
% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
4900
% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
4901
% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
4902
 
4903
% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
4904
\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
4905
 
4906
% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
4907
% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
4908
% have any width.
4909
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
4910
 
4911
% This space is always present above and below environments.
4912
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
4913
 
4914
% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
4915
% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
4916
% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
4917
% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
4918
%
4919
\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
4920
  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
4921
  % \sectionheading, q.v.
4922
  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
4923
    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
4924
    \endgraf
4925
    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
4926
      \removelastskip
4927
      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
4928
      % or better ...
4929
      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
4930
      \vskip\envskipamount
4931
    \fi
4932
  \fi
4933
}}
4934
 
4935
\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
4936
 
4937
% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
4938
\let\nonarrowing=\relax
4939
 
4940
% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
4941
% environment contents.
4942
\font\circle=lcircle10
4943
\newdimen\circthick
4944
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
4945
\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
4946
\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
4947
%
4948
\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
4949
\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
4950
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
4951
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
4952
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
4953
        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
4954
        \hskip\rskip}}
4955
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
4956
        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
4957
        \hskip\rskip}}
4958
%
4959
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
4960
 
4961
\envdef\cartouche{%
4962
  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
4963
  \startsavinginserts
4964
  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
4965
  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
4966
  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
4967
  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
4968
  \cartouter=\hsize
4969
  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt  % allow for 3pt kerns on either
4970
                                % side, and for 6pt waste from
4971
                                % each corner char, and rule thickness
4972
  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
4973
  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
4974
  \let\nonarrowing=\comment
4975
  \vbox\bgroup
4976
      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
4977
      \carttop
4978
      \hbox\bgroup
4979
          \hskip\lskip
4980
          \vrule\kern3pt
4981
          \vbox\bgroup
4982
              \kern3pt
4983
              \hsize=\cartinner
4984
              \baselineskip=\normbskip
4985
              \lineskip=\normlskip
4986
              \parskip=\normpskip
4987
              \vskip -\parskip
4988
              \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
4989
}
4990
\def\Ecartouche{%
4991
              \ifhmode\par\fi
4992
              \kern3pt
4993
          \egroup
4994
          \kern3pt\vrule
4995
          \hskip\rskip
4996
      \egroup
4997
      \cartbot
4998
  \egroup
4999
  \checkinserts
5000
}
5001
 
5002
 
5003
% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
5004
% inside a group.
5005
\def\nonfillstart{%
5006
  \aboveenvbreak
5007
  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
5008
  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
5009
  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
5010
  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
5011
  \parskip = 0pt
5012
  \parindent = 0pt
5013
  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
5014
  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
5015
  % at next level down.
5016
  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
5017
    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
5018
    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
5019
  \fi
5020
  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
5021
}
5022
 
5023
% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
5024
% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
5025
% This affects the following displayed environments:
5026
%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
5027
%
5028
\def\smallword{small}
5029
\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
5030
\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
5031
\def\setnormaldispenv{%
5032
  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
5033
    \smallexamplefonts \rm
5034
  \fi
5035
}
5036
\def\setsmalldispenv{%
5037
  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
5038
  \else
5039
    \smallexamplefonts \rm
5040
  \fi
5041
}
5042
 
5043
% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
5044
% Let's do it by one command:
5045
\def\makedispenv #1#2{
5046
  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
5047
  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
5048
  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
5049
  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
5050
}
5051
 
5052
% Define two synonyms:
5053
\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
5054
  \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
5055
  \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
5056
}
5057
 
5058
% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
5059
%
5060
% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
5061
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
5062
%
5063
\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
5064
  \nonfillstart
5065
  \tt
5066
  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
5067
  \gobble       % eat return
5068
}
5069
 
5070
% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
5071
%
5072
\makedispenv {display}{%
5073
  \nonfillstart
5074
  \gobble
5075
}
5076
 
5077
% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
5078
%
5079
\makedispenv{format}{%
5080
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
5081
  \nonfillstart
5082
  \gobble
5083
}
5084
 
5085
% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
5086
\envdef\flushleft{%
5087
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
5088
  \nonfillstart
5089
  \gobble
5090
}
5091
\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
5092
 
5093
% @flushright.
5094
%
5095
\envdef\flushright{%
5096
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
5097
  \nonfillstart
5098
  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
5099
  \gobble
5100
}
5101
\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
5102
 
5103
 
5104
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
5105
% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
5106
% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
5107
% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
5108
%
5109
\envdef\quotation{%
5110
  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
5111
  \parindent=0pt
5112
  %
5113
  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
5114
  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
5115
    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
5116
    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
5117
    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
5118
    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
5119
  \fi
5120
  \parsearg\quotationlabel
5121
}
5122
 
5123
% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
5124
% doing normal filling.
5125
%
5126
\def\Equotation{%
5127
  \par
5128
  \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
5129
    % indent a bit.
5130
    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
5131
  \fi
5132
  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
5133
}
5134
 
5135
% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
5136
\def\quotationlabel#1{%
5137
  \def\temp{#1}%
5138
  \ifx\temp\empty \else
5139
    {\bf #1: }%
5140
  \fi
5141
}
5142
 
5143
 
5144
% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
5145
% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
5146
% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
5147
% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
5148
%
5149
% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
5150
%
5151
% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
5152
% active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
5153
% verbatim line.
5154
\def\dospecials{%
5155
  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
5156
  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
5157
  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
5158
}
5159
%
5160
% [Knuth] p. 380
5161
\def\uncatcodespecials{%
5162
  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
5163
%
5164
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
5165
% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
5166
\begingroup
5167
  \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
5168
\endgroup
5169
%
5170
% Setup for the @verb command.
5171
%
5172
% Eight spaces for a tab
5173
\begingroup
5174
  \catcode`\^^I=\active
5175
  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
5176
\endgroup
5177
%
5178
\def\setupverb{%
5179
  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
5180
  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
5181
  \catcode`\`=\active
5182
  \tabeightspaces
5183
  % Respect line breaks,
5184
  % print special symbols as themselves, and
5185
  % make each space count
5186
  % must do in this order:
5187
  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
5188
}
5189
 
5190
% Setup for the @verbatim environment
5191
%
5192
% Real tab expansion
5193
\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
5194
%
5195
\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
5196
\begingroup
5197
  \catcode`\^^I=\active
5198
  \gdef\tabexpand{%
5199
    \catcode`\^^I=\active
5200
    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
5201
      \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
5202
      \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
5203
      \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
5204
      \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
5205
      \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
5206
    }%
5207
  }
5208
\endgroup
5209
\def\setupverbatim{%
5210
  \nonfillstart
5211
  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
5212
  % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
5213
  \tt
5214
  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
5215
  \catcode`\`=\active
5216
  \tabexpand
5217
  % Respect line breaks,
5218
  % print special symbols as themselves, and
5219
  % make each space count
5220
  % must do in this order:
5221
  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
5222
  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
5223
}
5224
 
5225
% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
5226
% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
5227
% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
5228
%
5229
%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
5230
%
5231
% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
5232
\begingroup
5233
  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
5234
  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
5235
\endgroup
5236
%
5237
\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
5238
%
5239
%
5240
% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
5241
% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
5242
%
5243
%     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
5244
%
5245
% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
5246
% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
5247
% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
5248
%
5249
% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
5250
%
5251
\begingroup
5252
  \catcode`\ =\active
5253
  \obeylines %
5254
  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
5255
  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
5256
  % line in the output.
5257
  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
5258
  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
5259
  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
5260
\endgroup
5261
%
5262
\envdef\verbatim{%
5263
    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
5264
}
5265
\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
5266
 
5267
 
5268
% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
5269
%
5270
\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
5271
%
5272
\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
5273
  {%
5274
    \makevalueexpandable
5275
    \setupverbatim
5276
    \input #1
5277
    \afterenvbreak
5278
  }%
5279
}
5280
 
5281
% @copying ... @end copying.
5282
% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
5283
%
5284
% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
5285
% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
5286
% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
5287
% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
5288
% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
5289
% possible is very desirable.
5290
%
5291
\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
5292
\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
5293
%
5294
\def\insertcopying{%
5295
  \begingroup
5296
    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
5297
    \scanexp\copyingtext
5298
  \endgroup
5299
}
5300
 
5301
\message{defuns,}
5302
% @defun etc.
5303
 
5304
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
5305
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
5306
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
5307
 
5308
% Start the processing of @deffn:
5309
\def\startdefun{%
5310
  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
5311
    \medbreak
5312
  \else
5313
    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
5314
    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
5315
    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
5316
    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
5317
    % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
5318
    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
5319
    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
5320
    %
5321
    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
5322
    %
5323
    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
5324
    % But do insert the glue.
5325
    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
5326
  \fi
5327
  %
5328
  \parindent=0in
5329
  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
5330
  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
5331
}
5332
 
5333
\def\dodefunx#1{%
5334
  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
5335
  \checkenv#1%
5336
  %
5337
  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
5338
  % It's not a great place, though.
5339
  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi
5340
  %
5341
  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
5342
  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
5343
}
5344
\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
5345
 
5346
% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
5347
%
5348
\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
5349
  \begingroup
5350
    % call \deffnheader:
5351
    #1#2 \endheader
5352
    % common ending:
5353
    \interlinepenalty = 10000
5354
    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
5355
    \endgraf
5356
    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
5357
    \penalty 10002  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
5358
    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
5359
    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
5360
    \checkparencounts
5361
  \endgroup
5362
}
5363
 
5364
\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
5365
 
5366
% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
5367
% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
5368
%
5369
\def\makedefun#1{%
5370
  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
5371
  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
5372
    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
5373
  \temp
5374
}
5375
 
5376
% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
5377
%
5378
% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
5379
% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
5380
%
5381
\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
5382
  \envdef#1{%
5383
    \startdefun
5384
    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
5385
  }%
5386
  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
5387
  \def#3%
5388
}
5389
 
5390
%%% Untyped functions:
5391
 
5392
% @deffn category name args
5393
\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
5394
 
5395
% @deffn category class name args
5396
\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
5397
 
5398
% \defopon {category on}class name args
5399
\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5400
 
5401
% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
5402
%
5403
\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
5404
  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
5405
  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
5406
  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
5407
}
5408
 
5409
%%% Typed functions:
5410
 
5411
% @deftypefn category type name args
5412
\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
5413
 
5414
% @deftypeop category class type name args
5415
\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
5416
 
5417
% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
5418
\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5419
 
5420
% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
5421
%
5422
\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
5423
  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
5424
  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
5425
}
5426
 
5427
%%% Typed variables:
5428
 
5429
% @deftypevr category type var args
5430
\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
5431
 
5432
% @deftypecv category class type var args
5433
\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
5434
 
5435
% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
5436
\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5437
 
5438
% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
5439
%
5440
\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
5441
  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
5442
  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
5443
}
5444
 
5445
%%% Untyped variables:
5446
 
5447
% @defvr category var args
5448
\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
5449
 
5450
% @defcv category class var args
5451
\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
5452
 
5453
% \defcvof {category of}class var args
5454
\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
5455
 
5456
%%% Type:
5457
% @deftp category name args
5458
\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
5459
  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
5460
  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
5461
}
5462
 
5463
% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
5464
\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
5465
\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
5466
\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
5467
\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
5468
\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
5469
\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
5470
\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
5471
\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
5472
\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
5473
\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
5474
\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
5475
 
5476
% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
5477
% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
5478
% #2 is the return type, if any.
5479
% #3 is the function name.
5480
%
5481
% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
5482
%
5483
\def\defname#1#2#3{%
5484
  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
5485
  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
5486
  %
5487
  % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
5488
  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
5489
  % just below it.
5490
  \def\temp{#1}%
5491
  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
5492
  %
5493
  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
5494
  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
5495
  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
5496
  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
5497
  % The continuations:
5498
  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
5499
  % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
5500
  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
5501
  %
5502
  % Put the type name to the right margin.
5503
  \noindent
5504
  \hbox to 0pt{%
5505
    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
5506
    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
5507
    \kern\leftskip
5508
    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
5509
  }%
5510
  %
5511
  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
5512
  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
5513
  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
5514
  {%
5515
    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
5516
    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
5517
    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
5518
    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
5519
    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
5520
    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
5521
    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
5522
    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
5523
    \df \tt
5524
    \def\temp{#2}% return value type
5525
    \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
5526
    #3% output function name
5527
  }%
5528
  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
5529
  %
5530
  \boldbrax
5531
  % arguments will be output next, if any.
5532
}
5533
 
5534
% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
5535
% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
5536
% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
5537
% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
5538
%
5539
\def\defunargs#1{%
5540
  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
5541
  % tt for the names.
5542
  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
5543
  %
5544
  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
5545
  % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that.
5546
  \let\var=\ttslanted
5547
  #1%
5548
  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
5549
}
5550
 
5551
% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
5552
%
5553
\def\activeparens{%
5554
  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
5555
  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
5556
  \catcode`\&=\active
5557
}
5558
 
5559
% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
5560
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
5561
 
5562
% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
5563
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
5564
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
5565
{
5566
  \activeparens
5567
  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
5568
  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
5569
  \global\let& = \&
5570
 
5571
  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
5572
  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
5573
}
5574
 
5575
\newcount\parencount
5576
 
5577
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
5578
\newif\ifampseen
5579
\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
5580
 
5581
\def\parenfont{%
5582
  \ifampseen
5583
    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
5584
    % otherwise use the default font.
5585
    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
5586
  \else
5587
    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
5588
    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
5589
    \sf
5590
  \fi
5591
}
5592
\def\infirstlevel#1{%
5593
  \ifampseen
5594
    \ifnum\parencount=1
5595
      #1%
5596
    \fi
5597
  \fi
5598
}
5599
\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
5600
 
5601
\def\opnr{%
5602
  \global\advance\parencount by 1
5603
  {\parenfont(}%
5604
  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
5605
}
5606
\def\clnr{%
5607
  {\parenfont)}%
5608
  \infirstlevel \sl
5609
  \global\advance\parencount by -1
5610
}
5611
 
5612
\newcount\brackcount
5613
\def\lbrb{%
5614
  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
5615
  {\bf[}%
5616
}
5617
\def\rbrb{%
5618
  {\bf]}%
5619
  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
5620
}
5621
 
5622
\def\checkparencounts{%
5623
  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
5624
  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
5625
}
5626
\def\badparencount{%
5627
  \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
5628
  \global\parencount=0
5629
}
5630
\def\badbrackcount{%
5631
  \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
5632
  \global\brackcount=0
5633
}
5634
 
5635
 
5636
\message{macros,}
5637
% @macro.
5638
 
5639
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
5640
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
5641
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
5642
  \newwrite\macscribble
5643
  \def\scantokens#1{%
5644
    \toks0={#1}%
5645
    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
5646
    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
5647
    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
5648
    \input \jobname.tmp
5649
  }
5650
\fi
5651
 
5652
\def\scanmacro#1{%
5653
  \begingroup
5654
    \newlinechar`\^^M
5655
    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
5656
    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
5657
    % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
5658
    % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
5659
    % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
5660
    % with macro expansion.                             --kasal, 19aug04
5661
    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
5662
    % ... and \example
5663
    \spaceisspace
5664
    %
5665
    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
5666
    %
5667
    % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
5668
    %                                                   --kasal, 29nov03
5669
    \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
5670
  \endgroup
5671
}
5672
 
5673
\def\scanexp#1{%
5674
  \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
5675
  \temp
5676
}
5677
 
5678
\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
5679
\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
5680
\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
5681
\def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
5682
                    % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
5683
 
5684
% Utility routines.
5685
% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
5686
%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
5687
% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
5688
%
5689
\def\cslet#1#2{%
5690
  \expandafter\let
5691
  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
5692
  \csname#2\endcsname
5693
}
5694
 
5695
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
5696
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
5697
{\catcode`\@=11
5698
\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
5699
\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
5700
\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
5701
\def\unbrace#1{#1}
5702
\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
5703
}
5704
 
5705
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
5706
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
5707
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
5708
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
5709
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
5710
}
5711
 
5712
% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
5713
% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
5714
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
5715
 
5716
% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
5717
% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
5718
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
5719
 
5720
\def\scanctxt{%
5721
  \catcode`\"=\other
5722
  \catcode`\+=\other
5723
  \catcode`\<=\other
5724
  \catcode`\>=\other
5725
  \catcode`\@=\other
5726
  \catcode`\^=\other
5727
  \catcode`\_=\other
5728
  \catcode`\|=\other
5729
  \catcode`\~=\other
5730
}
5731
 
5732
\def\scanargctxt{%
5733
  \scanctxt
5734
  \catcode`\\=\other
5735
  \catcode`\^^M=\other
5736
}
5737
 
5738
\def\macrobodyctxt{%
5739
  \scanctxt
5740
  \catcode`\{=\other
5741
  \catcode`\}=\other
5742
  \catcode`\^^M=\other
5743
  \usembodybackslash
5744
}
5745
 
5746
\def\macroargctxt{%
5747
  \scanctxt
5748
  \catcode`\\=\other
5749
}
5750
 
5751
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
5752
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
5753
% where N is the macro parameter number.
5754
% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
5755
% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
5756
 
5757
{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
5758
 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
5759
 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
5760
}
5761
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
5762
 
5763
\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
5764
\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
5765
 
5766
\def\macroxxx#1{%
5767
  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
5768
  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
5769
     \paramno=0%
5770
  \else
5771
     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
5772
  \fi
5773
  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
5774
     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
5775
  \else
5776
     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
5777
     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
5778
     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
5779
     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
5780
     % Add the macroname to \macrolist
5781
     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
5782
     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
5783
       \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
5784
  \fi
5785
  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
5786
  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
5787
  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
5788
  \fi}
5789
 
5790
\parseargdef\unmacro{%
5791
  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
5792
    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
5793
    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
5794
    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
5795
    \begingroup
5796
      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
5797
      \let\do\unmacrodo
5798
      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
5799
    \endgroup
5800
  \else
5801
    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
5802
  \fi
5803
}
5804
 
5805
% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
5806
% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
5807
%
5808
\def\unmacrodo#1{%
5809
  \ifx#1\relax
5810
    % remove this
5811
  \else
5812
    \noexpand\do \noexpand #1%
5813
  \fi
5814
}
5815
 
5816
% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
5817
% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
5818
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
5819
\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
5820
\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
5821
\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
5822
\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
5823
 
5824
% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
5825
% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
5826
% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
5827
% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
5828
 
5829
% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
5830
% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
5831
% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
5832
% it to # just before using the token list produced.
5833
%
5834
% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
5835
% the macro is used.
5836
 
5837
\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
5838
        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
5839
\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
5840
  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
5841
  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
5842
    \advance\paramno by 1%
5843
    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
5844
        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
5845
    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
5846
  \fi\next}
5847
 
5848
% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
5849
% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
5850
 
5851
\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
5852
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
5853
\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
5854
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
5855
 
5856
% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
5857
% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
5858
% Much magic with \expandafter here.
5859
% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
5860
% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
5861
\def\defmacro{%
5862
  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
5863
  \ifrecursive
5864
    \ifcase\paramno
5865
    % 0
5866
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5867
        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5868
    \or % 1
5869
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5870
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5871
         \noexpand\braceorline
5872
         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
5873
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
5874
         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5875
    \else % many
5876
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5877
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5878
         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
5879
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
5880
          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
5881
      \expandafter\expandafter
5882
      \expandafter\xdef
5883
      \expandafter\expandafter
5884
        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
5885
          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5886
    \fi
5887
  \else
5888
    \ifcase\paramno
5889
    % 0
5890
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5891
        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5892
        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5893
    \or % 1
5894
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5895
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5896
         \noexpand\braceorline
5897
         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
5898
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
5899
        \egroup
5900
        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5901
        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5902
    \else % many
5903
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5904
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5905
         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
5906
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
5907
          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
5908
      \expandafter\expandafter
5909
      \expandafter\xdef
5910
      \expandafter\expandafter
5911
      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
5912
      \paramlist{%
5913
          \egroup
5914
          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5915
          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5916
    \fi
5917
  \fi}
5918
 
5919
\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
5920
 
5921
% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
5922
% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
5923
% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
5924
% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
5925
\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
5926
\def\braceorlinexxx{%
5927
  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
5928
    \expandafter\parsearg
5929
  \fi \next}
5930
 
5931
% We want to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
5932
% expanded by \write.
5933
\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
5934
  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
5935
 
5936
% For \indexnofonts, we need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the
5937
% arguments (if present).  Of course this is not nearly correct, but it
5938
% is the best we can do for now.  makeinfo does not expand macros in the
5939
% argument to @deffn, which ends up writing an index entry, and texindex
5940
% isn't prepared for an index sort entry that starts with \.
5941
%
5942
% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
5943
% to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
5944
% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
5945
%
5946
\def\emptyusermacros{\begingroup
5947
  \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\noexpand\asis}%
5948
  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
5949
 
5950
 
5951
% @alias.
5952
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
5953
% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
5954
\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
5955
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
5956
\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
5957
  {%
5958
    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
5959
    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
5960
  }%
5961
  \next
5962
}
5963
 
5964
 
5965
\message{cross references,}
5966
 
5967
\newwrite\auxfile
5968
 
5969
\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
5970
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
5971
 
5972
% @inforef is relatively simple.
5973
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
5974
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
5975
  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
5976
 
5977
% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
5978
% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
5979
% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
5980
% @node foo , bar , ...
5981
% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
5982
%
5983
\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
5984
%
5985
% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
5986
% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
5987
\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
5988
\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
5989
 
5990
\let\nwnode=\node
5991
\let\lastnode=\empty
5992
 
5993
% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
5994
% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
5995
%
5996
\def\donoderef#1{%
5997
  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
5998
    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
5999
    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
6000
  \fi
6001
}
6002
 
6003
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
6004
%
6005
\newcount\savesfregister
6006
%
6007
\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
6008
\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
6009
\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
6010
 
6011
% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
6012
% anchor), which consists of three parts:
6013
% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
6014
%                 or the anchor name.
6015
% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
6016
%                 empty for anchors.
6017
% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
6018
%
6019
% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
6020
% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
6021
% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
6022
%
6023
\def\setref#1#2{%
6024
  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
6025
  \iflinks
6026
    {%
6027
      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
6028
      \turnoffactive
6029
      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
6030
        \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
6031
          ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
6032
      }%
6033
      \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
6034
      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
6035
      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
6036
      \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout
6037
    }%
6038
  \fi
6039
}
6040
 
6041
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
6042
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
6043
% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
6044
% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
6045
%
6046
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
6047
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
6048
\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
6049
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
6050
  \unsepspaces
6051
  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
6052
  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
6053
  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
6054
  \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
6055
  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
6056
    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
6057
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
6058
      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
6059
      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
6060
    \else
6061
      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
6062
      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
6063
      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
6064
        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
6065
        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
6066
      \else
6067
        \ifhavexrefs
6068
          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
6069
          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
6070
        \else
6071
          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
6072
          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
6073
        \fi%
6074
      \fi
6075
    \fi
6076
  \fi
6077
  %
6078
  % Make link in pdf output.
6079
  \ifpdf
6080
    \leavevmode
6081
    \getfilename{#4}%
6082
    {\turnoffactive
6083
     % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
6084
     {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
6085
      \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
6086
     %
6087
     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
6088
       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
6089
         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
6090
     \else
6091
       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
6092
         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
6093
     \fi
6094
    }%
6095
    \linkcolor
6096
  \fi
6097
  %
6098
  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
6099
  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
6100
  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
6101
  {%
6102
    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
6103
    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
6104
    \indexnofonts
6105
    \turnoffactive
6106
    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
6107
      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
6108
  }%
6109
  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
6110
    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
6111
    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
6112
    \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
6113
      \refx{#1-snt}%
6114
    \else
6115
      \printedrefname
6116
    \fi
6117
    %
6118
    % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
6119
    % "in MANUALNAME".
6120
    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
6121
      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
6122
    \fi
6123
  \else
6124
    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
6125
    %
6126
    % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
6127
    % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
6128
    % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
6129
    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
6130
    % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
6131
    % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
6132
    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
6133
      \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
6134
    \else
6135
      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
6136
      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
6137
      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
6138
      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
6139
      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
6140
      {\turnoffactive
6141
       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
6142
       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
6143
       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
6144
       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
6145
      }%
6146
      % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
6147
      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
6148
      %
6149
      % But we always want a comma and a space:
6150
      ,\space
6151
      %
6152
      % output the `page 3'.
6153
      \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
6154
    \fi
6155
  \fi
6156
  \endlink
6157
\endgroup}
6158
 
6159
% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
6160
% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
6161
% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
6162
% one that Bob is working on :).
6163
%
6164
\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
6165
 
6166
% Things referred to by \setref.
6167
%
6168
\def\Ynothing{}
6169
\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
6170
\def\Ynumbered{%
6171
  \ifnum\secno=0
6172
    \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
6173
  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
6174
    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
6175
  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
6176
    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
6177
  \else
6178
    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
6179
  \fi\fi\fi
6180
}
6181
\def\Yappendix{%
6182
  \ifnum\secno=0
6183
     \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
6184
  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
6185
     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
6186
  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
6187
    \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
6188
  \else
6189
    \putwordSection@tie
6190
      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
6191
  \fi\fi\fi
6192
}
6193
 
6194
% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
6195
% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
6196
%
6197
\def\refx#1#2{%
6198
  {%
6199
    \indexnofonts
6200
    \otherbackslash
6201
    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
6202
      \csname XR#1\endcsname
6203
  }%
6204
  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
6205
    % If not defined, say something at least.
6206
    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
6207
    \iflinks
6208
      \ifhavexrefs
6209
        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
6210
      \else
6211
        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
6212
          \global\warnedxrefstrue
6213
          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
6214
        \fi
6215
      \fi
6216
    \fi
6217
  \else
6218
    % It's defined, so just use it.
6219
    \thisrefX
6220
  \fi
6221
  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
6222
}
6223
 
6224
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
6225
% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
6226
% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
6227
%
6228
\def\xrdef#1#2{%
6229
  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value.
6230
  %
6231
  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
6232
  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname
6233
    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
6234
    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
6235
      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
6236
    %
6237
    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
6238
    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
6239
      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
6240
    \else
6241
      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
6242
      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
6243
    \fi
6244
    %
6245
    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
6246
    % for later use in \listoffloats.
6247
    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}%
6248
  \fi
6249
}
6250
 
6251
% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
6252
%
6253
\def\tryauxfile{%
6254
  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
6255
  \ifeof 1 \else
6256
    \readdatafile{aux}%
6257
    \global\havexrefstrue
6258
  \fi
6259
  \closein 1
6260
}
6261
 
6262
\def\setupdatafile{%
6263
  \catcode`\^^@=\other
6264
  \catcode`\^^A=\other
6265
  \catcode`\^^B=\other
6266
  \catcode`\^^C=\other
6267
  \catcode`\^^D=\other
6268
  \catcode`\^^E=\other
6269
  \catcode`\^^F=\other
6270
  \catcode`\^^G=\other
6271
  \catcode`\^^H=\other
6272
  \catcode`\^^K=\other
6273
  \catcode`\^^L=\other
6274
  \catcode`\^^N=\other
6275
  \catcode`\^^P=\other
6276
  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
6277
  \catcode`\^^R=\other
6278
  \catcode`\^^S=\other
6279
  \catcode`\^^T=\other
6280
  \catcode`\^^U=\other
6281
  \catcode`\^^V=\other
6282
  \catcode`\^^W=\other
6283
  \catcode`\^^X=\other
6284
  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
6285
  \catcode`\^^[=\other
6286
  \catcode`\^^\=\other
6287
  \catcode`\^^]=\other
6288
  \catcode`\^^^=\other
6289
  \catcode`\^^_=\other
6290
  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
6291
  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
6292
  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
6293
  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
6294
  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
6295
  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
6296
  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
6297
  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
6298
  %
6299
  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
6300
  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
6301
  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
6302
  %
6303
  \catcode`\^=\other
6304
  %
6305
  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
6306
  \catcode`\~=\other
6307
  \catcode`\[=\other
6308
  \catcode`\]=\other
6309
  \catcode`\"=\other
6310
  \catcode`\_=\other
6311
  \catcode`\|=\other
6312
  \catcode`\<=\other
6313
  \catcode`\>=\other
6314
  \catcode`\$=\other
6315
  \catcode`\#=\other
6316
  \catcode`\&=\other
6317
  \catcode`\%=\other
6318
  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
6319
  %
6320
  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
6321
  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
6322
  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
6323
  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
6324
  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
6325
  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
6326
  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
6327
  \catcode`\\=\other
6328
  %
6329
  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
6330
  {%
6331
    \count1=128
6332
    \def\loop{%
6333
      \catcode\count1=\other
6334
      \advance\count1 by 1
6335
      \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
6336
    }%
6337
  }%
6338
  %
6339
  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
6340
  \catcode`\{=1
6341
  \catcode`\}=2
6342
  \catcode`\@=0
6343
}
6344
 
6345
\def\readdatafile#1{%
6346
\begingroup
6347
  \setupdatafile
6348
  \input\jobname.#1
6349
\endgroup}
6350
 
6351
\message{insertions,}
6352
% including footnotes.
6353
 
6354
\newcount \footnoteno
6355
 
6356
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
6357
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
6358
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
6359
% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
6360
% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
6361
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
6362
 
6363
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
6364
\let\footnotestyle=\comment
6365
 
6366
{\catcode `\@=11
6367
%
6368
% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
6369
\gdef\footnote{%
6370
  \let\indent=\ptexindent
6371
  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
6372
  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
6373
  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
6374
  %
6375
  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
6376
  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
6377
  \let\@sf\empty
6378
  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
6379
  %
6380
  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
6381
  \unskip
6382
  \thisfootno\@sf
6383
  \dofootnote
6384
}%
6385
 
6386
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
6387
% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
6388
%
6389
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
6390
% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
6391
% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
6392
%
6393
\gdef\dofootnote{%
6394
  \insert\footins\bgroup
6395
  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
6396
  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
6397
  % So reset some parameters.
6398
  \hsize=\pagewidth
6399
  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
6400
  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
6401
  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
6402
  \floatingpenalty\@MM
6403
  \leftskip\z@skip
6404
  \rightskip\z@skip
6405
  \spaceskip\z@skip
6406
  \xspaceskip\z@skip
6407
  \parindent\defaultparindent
6408
  %
6409
  \smallfonts \rm
6410
  %
6411
  % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
6412
  % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
6413
  % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
6414
  % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
6415
  \let\noindent = \relax
6416
  %
6417
  % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
6418
  % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
6419
  \everypar = {\hang}%
6420
  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
6421
  %
6422
  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
6423
  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
6424
  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
6425
  \footstrut
6426
  \futurelet\next\fo@t
6427
}
6428
}%end \catcode `\@=11
6429
 
6430
% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
6431
% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
6432
% would be lost.
6433
% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
6434
% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
6435
% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
6436
 
6437
% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
6438
% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
6439
% out prematurely.
6440
%
6441
\def\startsavinginserts{%
6442
  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
6443
    \let\insert\saveinsert
6444
  \else
6445
    \let\checkinserts\relax
6446
  \fi
6447
}
6448
 
6449
% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
6450
% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
6451
%
6452
\def\saveinsert#1{%
6453
  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
6454
  \afterassignment\next
6455
  % swallow the left brace
6456
  \let\temp =
6457
}
6458
\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
6459
\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
6460
 
6461
\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
6462
 
6463
\def\placesaveins#1{%
6464
  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
6465
    {\box#1}%
6466
}
6467
 
6468
% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
6469
{
6470
  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
6471
  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
6472
}
6473
 
6474
% initialization:
6475
\def\newsaveins #1{%
6476
  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
6477
  \next
6478
}
6479
\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
6480
  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
6481
  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
6482
    \checksaveins #1}%
6483
}
6484
 
6485
% initialize:
6486
\let\checkinserts\empty
6487
\newsaveins\footins
6488
\newsaveins\margin
6489
 
6490
 
6491
% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
6492
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
6493
%
6494
% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
6495
% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
6496
% undone and the next image would fail.
6497
\openin 1 = epsf.tex
6498
\ifeof 1 \else
6499
  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
6500
  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
6501
  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
6502
  \input epsf.tex
6503
\fi
6504
\closein 1
6505
%
6506
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
6507
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
6508
\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
6509
  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
6510
  it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
6511
%
6512
\def\image#1{%
6513
  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
6514
    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
6515
      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
6516
      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
6517
      \global\warnednoepsftrue
6518
    \fi
6519
  \else
6520
    \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
6521
  \fi
6522
}
6523
%
6524
% Arguments to @image:
6525
% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
6526
% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
6527
% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
6528
% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
6529
% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
6530
\newif\ifimagevmode
6531
\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
6532
  \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
6533
  \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
6534
  % If the image is by itself, center it.
6535
  \ifvmode
6536
    \imagevmodetrue
6537
    \nobreak\bigskip
6538
    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
6539
    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
6540
    % above and below.
6541
    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
6542
    \nobreak
6543
    \line\bgroup\hss
6544
  \fi
6545
  %
6546
  % Output the image.
6547
  \ifpdf
6548
    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
6549
  \else
6550
    % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
6551
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
6552
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
6553
    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
6554
  \fi
6555
  %
6556
  \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
6557
\endgroup}
6558
 
6559
 
6560
% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
6561
% etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
6562
% float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
6563
%
6564
\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
6565
 
6566
% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
6567
\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
6568
 
6569
% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
6570
% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
6571
% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
6572
%
6573
% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
6574
% be referable.
6575
%
6576
% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
6577
% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
6578
%
6579
% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
6580
% chapter-level command.
6581
\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
6582
%
6583
\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
6584
  \let\thiscaption=\empty
6585
  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
6586
  %
6587
  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
6588
  %
6589
  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
6590
  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
6591
  %
6592
  \startsavinginserts
6593
  %
6594
  % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
6595
  \par
6596
  %
6597
  \vtop\bgroup
6598
    \def\floattype{#1}%
6599
    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
6600
    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
6601
    %
6602
    \ifx\floattype\empty
6603
      \let\safefloattype=\empty
6604
    \else
6605
      {%
6606
        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
6607
        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
6608
        \indexnofonts
6609
        \turnoffactive
6610
        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
6611
      }%
6612
    \fi
6613
    %
6614
    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
6615
    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6616
      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
6617
      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
6618
      %
6619
      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
6620
      \global\advance\floatno by 1
6621
      %
6622
      {%
6623
        % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the
6624
        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
6625
        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
6626
        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
6627
        % lists of floats.
6628
        %
6629
        \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
6630
        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
6631
      }%
6632
    \fi
6633
    %
6634
    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
6635
    \vskip\parskip
6636
    %
6637
    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
6638
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
6639
}
6640
 
6641
% we have these possibilities:
6642
% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
6643
% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
6644
% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
6645
% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
6646
% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
6647
% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
6648
% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
6649
% @float & no caption:
6650
%
6651
\def\Efloat{%
6652
    \let\floatident = \empty
6653
    %
6654
    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
6655
    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
6656
    %
6657
    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
6658
    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6659
      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
6660
        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
6661
      \fi
6662
      % the number.
6663
      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
6664
    \fi
6665
    %
6666
    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
6667
    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
6668
    \let\captionline = \floatident
6669
    %
6670
    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
6671
      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
6672
        \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
6673
      \fi
6674
      %
6675
      % caption text.
6676
      \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
6677
    \fi
6678
    %
6679
    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
6680
    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
6681
    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
6682
      \vskip.5\parskip
6683
      \captionline
6684
      %
6685
      % Space below caption.
6686
      \vskip\parskip
6687
    \fi
6688
    %
6689
    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
6690
    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
6691
    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6692
      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
6693
      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
6694
      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
6695
      {%
6696
        \atdummies \turnoffactive
6697
        % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
6698
        % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
6699
        % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
6700
        \scanexp{%
6701
          \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
6702
            \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
6703
              \thiscaption
6704
            \else
6705
              \thisshortcaption
6706
            \fi
6707
          }%
6708
        }%
6709
        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
6710
          \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
6711
      }%
6712
    \fi
6713
  \egroup  % end of \vtop
6714
  %
6715
  % place the captured inserts
6716
  %
6717
  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
6718
  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
6719
  %
6720
  \checkinserts
6721
}
6722
 
6723
% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
6724
%
6725
\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
6726
  \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
6727
}
6728
 
6729
% @caption, @shortcaption
6730
%
6731
\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
6732
\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
6733
\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
6734
\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
6735
 
6736
% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
6737
% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
6738
\def\getfloatno#1{%
6739
  \ifx#1\relax
6740
      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
6741
      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
6742
      %
6743
      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
6744
      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
6745
        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
6746
  \fi
6747
  \let\floatno#1%
6748
}
6749
 
6750
% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
6751
% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
6752
% first read the @float command.
6753
%
6754
\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
6755
 
6756
% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
6757
% distinguish floats from other xref types.
6758
\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
6759
 
6760
% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
6761
% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
6762
% \thissection value which we \setref above.
6763
%
6764
\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
6765
%
6766
% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
6767
% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
6768
%
6769
\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
6770
  \def\temp{#1}%
6771
  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
6772
  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
6773
}
6774
 
6775
% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
6776
%
6777
\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
6778
  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
6779
  {%
6780
    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
6781
    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
6782
    \indexnofonts
6783
    \turnoffactive
6784
    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
6785
  }%
6786
  %
6787
  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
6788
  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
6789
    \ifhavexrefs
6790
      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
6791
      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
6792
    \fi
6793
  \else
6794
    \begingroup
6795
      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
6796
      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
6797
      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
6798
    \endgroup
6799
  \fi
6800
}
6801
 
6802
% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
6803
% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
6804
% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
6805
% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
6806
%
6807
% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
6808
% they won't appear in the aux file).
6809
%
6810
\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
6811
\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
6812
  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
6813
  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
6814
  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
6815
  % in pdf output.
6816
  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
6817
  %
6818
  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
6819
  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
6820
  \writeentry
6821
}}
6822
 
6823
\message{localization,}
6824
% and i18n.
6825
 
6826
% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
6827
% @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
6828
% properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
6829
% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
6830
%
6831
\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
6832
  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
6833
    % Read the file if it exists.
6834
    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
6835
    \ifeof 1
6836
      \errhelp = \nolanghelp
6837
      \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
6838
    \else
6839
      \input txi-#1.tex
6840
    \fi
6841
    \closein 1
6842
  \endgroup
6843
}
6844
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
6845
is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
6846
should work if nowhere else does.}
6847
 
6848
 
6849
% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
6850
% likely, but for now just recognize it.
6851
\let\documentencoding = \comment
6852
 
6853
 
6854
% Page size parameters.
6855
%
6856
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
6857
 
6858
\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
6859
\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
6860
\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
6861
 
6862
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
6863
\vbadness = 10000
6864
 
6865
% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
6866
\hbadness = 2000
6867
 
6868
% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
6869
\widowpenalty=10000
6870
\clubpenalty=10000
6871
 
6872
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
6873
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
6874
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
6875
% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
6876
%
6877
\def\setemergencystretch{%
6878
  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
6879
    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
6880
    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
6881
  \else
6882
    \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
6883
  \fi
6884
}
6885
 
6886
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
6887
% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
6888
% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
6889
%
6890
% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
6891
% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
6892
%
6893
\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
6894
  \voffset = #3\relax
6895
  \topskip = #6\relax
6896
  \splittopskip = \topskip
6897
  %
6898
  \vsize = #1\relax
6899
  \advance\vsize by \topskip
6900
  \outervsize = \vsize
6901
  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
6902
  \pageheight = \vsize
6903
  %
6904
  \hsize = #2\relax
6905
  \outerhsize = \hsize
6906
  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
6907
  \pagewidth = \hsize
6908
  %
6909
  \normaloffset = #4\relax
6910
  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
6911
  %
6912
  \ifpdf
6913
    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
6914
    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
6915
  \fi
6916
  %
6917
  \setleading{\textleading}
6918
  %
6919
  \parindent = \defaultparindent
6920
  \setemergencystretch
6921
}
6922
 
6923
% @letterpaper (the default).
6924
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6925
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6926
  \textleading = 13.2pt
6927
  %
6928
  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
6929
  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
6930
                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
6931
                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
6932
                    {11in}{8.5in}%
6933
}}
6934
 
6935
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
6936
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
6937
  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
6938
  \textleading = 12pt
6939
  %
6940
  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
6941
                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
6942
                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
6943
                    {9.25in}{7in}%
6944
  %
6945
  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
6946
  \tolerance = 700
6947
  \hfuzz = 1pt
6948
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6949
  \defbodyindent = .5cm
6950
}}
6951
 
6952
% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
6953
% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
6954
\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
6955
  \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
6956
  \textleading = 12pt
6957
  %
6958
  \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
6959
                    {-.2in}{-.4in}%
6960
                    {0pt}{14pt}%
6961
                    {9in}{6in}%
6962
  %
6963
  \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
6964
  \tolerance = 700
6965
  \hfuzz = 1pt
6966
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6967
  \defbodyindent = .4cm
6968
}}
6969
 
6970
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
6971
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6972
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6973
  \textleading = 13.2pt
6974
  %
6975
  % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
6976
  % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
6977
  % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
6978
  % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
6979
  % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
6980
  % your texinfo source file like this:
6981
  % @tex
6982
  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
6983
  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
6984
  % @end tex
6985
  \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
6986
                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
6987
                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
6988
                    {297mm}{210mm}%
6989
  %
6990
  \tolerance = 700
6991
  \hfuzz = 1pt
6992
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6993
  \defbodyindent = 5mm
6994
}}
6995
 
6996
% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
6997
% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
6998
% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
6999
\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
7000
  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
7001
  \textleading = 12.5pt
7002
  %
7003
  \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
7004
                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
7005
                    {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
7006
                    {210mm}{148mm}%
7007
  %
7008
  \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
7009
  \tolerance = 800
7010
  \hfuzz = 1.2pt
7011
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
7012
  \defbodyindent = 2mm
7013
  \tableindent = 12mm
7014
}}
7015
 
7016
% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
7017
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
7018
  \afourpaper
7019
  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
7020
                    {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
7021
                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
7022
                    {297mm}{210mm}%
7023
  %
7024
  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
7025
  \globaldefs = 0
7026
}}
7027
 
7028
% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
7029
\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
7030
  \afourpaper
7031
  \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
7032
                    {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
7033
                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
7034
                    {297mm}{210mm}%
7035
  \globaldefs = 0
7036
}}
7037
 
7038
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
7039
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
7040
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
7041
%
7042
\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
7043
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
7044
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
7045
  \globaldefs = 1
7046
  %
7047
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
7048
  \setleading{\textleading}%
7049
  %
7050
  \dimen0 = #1
7051
  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
7052
  %
7053
  \dimen2 = \hsize
7054
  \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
7055
  %
7056
  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
7057
                    {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
7058
                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
7059
                    {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
7060
}}
7061
 
7062
% Set default to letter.
7063
%
7064
\letterpaper
7065
 
7066
 
7067
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
7068
 
7069
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
7070
\catcode`\"=\other
7071
\catcode`\~=\other
7072
\catcode`\^=\other
7073
\catcode`\_=\other
7074
\catcode`\|=\other
7075
\catcode`\<=\other
7076
\catcode`\>=\other
7077
\catcode`\+=\other
7078
\catcode`\$=\other
7079
\def\normaldoublequote{"}
7080
\def\normaltilde{~}
7081
\def\normalcaret{^}
7082
\def\normalunderscore{_}
7083
\def\normalverticalbar{|}
7084
\def\normalless{<}
7085
\def\normalgreater{>}
7086
\def\normalplus{+}
7087
\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
7088
 
7089
% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
7090
% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
7091
% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
7092
%
7093
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
7094
% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
7095
% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
7096
% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
7097
%
7098
\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
7099
 
7100
% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
7101
% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
7102
% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
7103
% this is not a problem.
7104
\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
7105
 
7106
% Turn off all special characters except @
7107
% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
7108
% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
7109
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
7110
 
7111
\catcode`\"=\active
7112
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
7113
\let"=\activedoublequote
7114
\catcode`\~=\active
7115
\def~{{\tt\char126}}
7116
\chardef\hat=`\^
7117
\catcode`\^=\active
7118
\def^{{\tt \hat}}
7119
 
7120
\catcode`\_=\active
7121
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
7122
\let\realunder=_
7123
% Subroutine for the previous macro.
7124
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
7125
 
7126
\catcode`\|=\active
7127
\def|{{\tt\char124}}
7128
\chardef \less=`\<
7129
\catcode`\<=\active
7130
\def<{{\tt \less}}
7131
\chardef \gtr=`\>
7132
\catcode`\>=\active
7133
\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
7134
\catcode`\+=\active
7135
\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
7136
\catcode`\$=\active
7137
\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
7138
 
7139
% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
7140
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
7141
% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
7142
% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
7143
\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
7144
 
7145
\catcode`\@=0
7146
 
7147
% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
7148
% as in \char`\\.
7149
\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
7150
\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
7151
 
7152
% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
7153
% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
7154
% catcode other.
7155
{\catcode`\\=\active
7156
 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
7157
 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
7158
}
7159
 
7160
% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
7161
% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
7162
{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
7163
 
7164
% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
7165
\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\backslashcurfont}}
7166
 
7167
\catcode`\\=\active
7168
 
7169
% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
7170
% even after parsing them.
7171
@def@turnoffactive{%
7172
  @let"=@normaldoublequote
7173
  @let\=@realbackslash
7174
  @let~=@normaltilde
7175
  @let^=@normalcaret
7176
  @let_=@normalunderscore
7177
  @let|=@normalverticalbar
7178
  @let<=@normalless
7179
  @let>=@normalgreater
7180
  @let+=@normalplus
7181
  @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
7182
  @unsepspaces
7183
}
7184
 
7185
% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
7186
% the literal character `\'.  (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
7187
% effect.)
7188
%
7189
@def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash}
7190
 
7191
% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
7192
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
7193
@otherifyactive
7194
 
7195
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
7196
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
7197
% a backslash.
7198
%
7199
@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
7200
@global@let\ = @eatinput
7201
 
7202
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
7203
% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
7204
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
7205
% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
7206
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
7207
%
7208
@gdef@fixbackslash{%
7209
  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
7210
  @catcode`+=@active
7211
  @catcode`@_=@active
7212
}
7213
 
7214
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
7215
@escapechar = `@@
7216
 
7217
% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
7218
@catcode`@& = @other
7219
@catcode`@# = @other
7220
@catcode`@% = @other
7221
 
7222
 
7223
@c Local variables:
7224
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
7225
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
7226
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
7227
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
7228
@c time-stamp-end: "}"
7229
@c End:
7230
 
7231
@c vim:sw=2:
7232
 
7233
@ignore
7234
   arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
7235
@end ignore

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.